Home

Modular Plus System Administration Guide

1. Speed dial number is displayed k Show XXX Speed dial Show i i Enter number F Next Use prime line Fk Next Display digits if display digits N Name COS pswds Fk Next Bypass restrn I Show Show pwd Terminals amp Extns SysAdmin 727587 a Call Log pswds F Next Sys admin 23646 RUES I Show Show extn F Next Basic 22742 k Show Log pswd Lines Progrming pswds Show Desk pswd 4677 HOSP Next F Next Cond None Next i Reg pswd 72346 SANS Hunt group lt DN gt FN F Show Member extns gt Next F Next Line assignment Hospitality Show F Next Mode Sys speed dial Show F Next Hunt delay F Next If busy k Next Q Timeout Hunt groups Show Next F Next Overflow F Next Name Next Passwords Show F Next Dstnct ring Featr settings Show Backgrnd music T F Next On hold Ai P Next Hour Next F Next Receiver volume P Next Minutes H Next Camp timeout F Next Year Direct dial F Next Park timeout Time amp Date l Show Next Month I Show D dial1 F Next Park Mode Next Day Show Intl Next Trnsfr callbk Next F Next Trnsfr callbk Next H Next Netwk callbk System prgrming Eos F Next Held reminder Remote access Show F Next Remind delay F Next Confrence tone PES Nex
2. Square Hybrid PBX Call Fwd Conf Line 1 Call Fwd Conf Blank CallFwd Conf Spd Dial Transfer Line Pool Sod Dial Transfer Blank Spd Dial Transfer Last No DND Blank Last No OND Blank LastNo OND Save No Pick Up Blank Save No Pick Up Blank Save No Pick Up Blank Blank Vce Cal Blank Blank Vee Cal Blank Blank Vce Call Blank Blank Page Blank Blank Page Blank Blank Page Blank Blank Intercom Blank Blank ntercom Blank Blank Intercom Blank Blank Intercom Blank Blank Intercom Blank Blank Intercom _ Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 About your system telephones 209 Central Answering Position CAPN The Central Answering Position telephone CAPN is a Norstar M7324N telephone connected to at least one CAPN module The CAPN module is an add on device that provides 48 extra memory or line keys You can connect one or two CAPN modules to an M7324N telephone The CAPN is usually the Prime extension and the Direct Dial telephone for the lines and telephones it serves M7324N telephone CAPN modules The CAPN module key mapping is the same for all templates All keys are blank keys by default M7310N telephone The M7310N telephone has a two
3. Feature To activate To cancel Key Inguiry 0 Last Number Redial B Line pools 6 4 Line redirection 8 4 B U4 not available on M7100N and T7100 Logit Call Logs 81106 Long tones 8 0 6 Memory keys Programming B or 2 or i Erasing 1 then ak Messages Reply 6 6 66 Sending E JE View messages 6 6 Moving line keys 8 f Ce Page General 6 Internal 6 fi External 6 B Internal and external 6 B Pause 7 B Priority Call 6 8 To block a Priority call 8 6 Privacy BJ 6 BJ Programmed release 8 eJ Recall MAUR Ring Again 2 Ring Type 6 Ring Volume 8 0 Run Stop g Saved Number Redial 6 7 P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 318 Feature guick reference Feature To activate To cancel Services Ringing service aJ zf HB Restriction service 81712 He Routing service 8 7 B Show Time and Date 810 6 Static Time Ce J e 06 aama System Wide Call to Appearances SWCA Move clock forward by 1 hour Je Move clock back by 1 hour 2 212 6 Speed Dial Making a call 6 Storing a Speed Dial 4 code Transfer Z o Trunk Answer eJoJO J Voice Call 6jJ6 Voice Call Deny 8 B 6 6 Wait for Dial Tone 6 6 4
4. Square Hybrid PBX Line 1 Line 1 Line Pool Line2 Line Pool Pick Up Last No Last No Last No Page Page Page Spd Dial Spd Dial Spd Dial Conf tran Conf tran Confftran Intercom Intercom Intercom Intercom Intercom Intercom Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 About your system telephones 211 M7100N T7100 telephones These telephones have a single line display and a single memory key with no indicator M7100N These telephones do not have any line keys so they may work slightly differently from the display telephones for some of the call features For instance where other telephones may require you to select a line key to answer a call for these telephones you pick up the handset Where other telephones require you to select a line key to take a call off hold you press on these sets The M7100N and T7100 telephones cannot have a Handsfree Mute key The one feature key on these sets is always defaulted to Last Number redial You will find special instructions for these telephones in some feature descriptions M7100N T7100 key assignment all templates M7000 T7000 telephone The M7000 T7000 telephones do not have a display or line keys They do have four programmable memory buttons without indicators To answer a call with the this type of telephone lift the handset To place a call on hold you press the
5. ISDN terminal features The Call Forward All Calls and Transfer features can be used from an ISDN terminal connected to Modular Plus On most ISDN terminals you need to press one or more keys to access feature services before you enter the feature code for these features To see what keys to press consult the instructions that came with the ISDN terminal Note Although ISDN terminals may have Transfer and Call Forward keys or display prompts these keys do not activate Modular Plus features Always use the appropriate procedure to access feature services then enter the feature code as described below Other Norstar extension features are not available to ISDN terminals In addition you cannot retrieve a parked call or use the Direct Dial digit to reach a Direct Dial extension from an ISDN terminal Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Feature guick reference 319 Call Forward All Calls Transfer Using the Call Forward All Calls feature The Call Forward All Calls feature allows you to forward your calls to another telephone in your Modular Plus system 1 Press 4 2 Enter the number of the extension you want your calls forwarded to followed by f 3 Enter the appropriate key to send Cancelling Call Forward 1 Press J 2 Enter the appropriate key to send Using the Transfer feature The Transfer feature allows you to transfer a call to an internal or external
6. 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Exths 4 Press Next until the display shows Sastem Fr9rming 5 Press Show _ The display shows Hunt araurs 6 Press Next until the display shows Featr settings 7 Press Show The display shows Backarmd music 8 Press Next until the display shows Receiver volume 9 Press Show _ and use CHANGE to choose Use sys volume or Use extn volume 10 Press 48 to exit or to continue in programming Note This feature is not available on some older telephones You can send an external call to another extension even though all of its lines are busy using the Camp on feature It is useful for people who process many calls such as secretaries or receptionists Camp timeout specifies the number of seconds before an unanswered call returns to the telephone that camped the call See Transferring to a busy extension Call Camping on page 248 for information about using this feature 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Password 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Extns P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 134 Programming feature settings Park timeout ee A oN ee Press Press Press Press Press Next Show Next Show Next
7. 296 Programmed Release 297 e Recall 297 Run Stop 297 e Wait for Dial Tone 298 P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 296 Special dialling features Special dialling features System telephones can access a remote system or dial a number on a private network by using host system access features such as Recall Pause Wait for Dial Tone and Run Stop These features either send a special signal to the host system or allow you to programme delays reguired by host systems to external autodial keys or speed dial codes Inserting a pause The Pause feature enters a 3 5 second delay in a dialling seguence on an exchange line You may need this for signalling remote devices such as answering machines or when dialling through to PBX features or host systems You can programme more than one pause in an external autodial or speed dial seguence For pulse dialling inserts a 1 5 second pause into the dialling seguence The pause symbol 4 uses one of the 24 spaces in a dialling seguence Press while programming a dialling seguence Note You can obtain a pause with one key press if you programme the feature code to a memory key More than one pause can be programmed to an external autodial key Setting long tones The Long Tones feature allows you to control the length of a tone so that you can signal devices such as fax or answering machines which re
8. 12 Press CHAHGE and use the keypad to enter the number of the restriction filter to be assigned to the telephone for each schedule The following table shows the default restrictions Default filters for extensions Schedule Restriction filter Normal 02 Sched 1 Night 11 Sched 2 Evening 12 Sched 3 Lunch 13 Sched 4 00 Sched 5 00 Sched 6 00 P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 86 Barring calls and privileges Restrictions This means for example that if you enter a set of restrictions for filter 11 they are automatically applied when the Night schedule is in use 13 Press 4 to quit or to continue in programming Assigning filters to a line Line restrns Line restrictions allows you to assign a restriction filter to a line to prevent certain numbers from being dialled from any telephone with that line appearance You can assign a different restriction filter for normal service and for each of six schedules See Using alternate or scheduled services on page 158 for more information about the schedules 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fassmord 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Extns 4 Press Next The displays shows Lines 5 Press Show The display shows Show linet
9. 124 e Setting the distribution mode 125 Setting the hunt delay 126 Programming options if all hunt group members are busy 126 Programming the queue timeout 127 Programming the overflow extension 128 e Setting the name 128 e Checking hunt group metrics 129 P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 120 Programming Hunt groups Hunt Groups The hunt groups feature allows you to establish hunt groups in your system to allow incoming calls to reach a group of extensions using a single directory number Hunt groups are used in situations where a group of people performing the same task are required to answer a number of related queries Some typical uses of hunt groups are asales department answering questions about product prices availability etc a support department answering questions concerning the operation of a product an emergency department answering calls for help A company with support services for different products may want to have a hunt group dedicated to each product Support personnel handling Product A can be in one group and support personnel handling Product B can be in another group Incoming calls look for the next available extension in the group If no extension is available the hunt groups feature places the call in a queue or routes it to an overflow extension Under the hunt groups sub headin
10. P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 42 Programming Terminals and Extensions Terminals amp Extensions Terminals amp Extns allows you to assign settings to each telephone l Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press 2 66 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Password i Press 7 2 7 5 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Term inals amp extrs Press Show _ The display shows Show extn Enter the extension number of the telephone you want to programme The display shows nnn innn nnn represents the three digit extension number Assigning a line to an extension line access Line access allows you to assign lines to individual telephones When you are finished programming line access settings for one telephone you can copy those settings to other telephones by pressing the display key under COPY at the Line Access display For more information about copying extension programming see Copying programming for telephones on page 147 Line assignment This setting allows you to assign physical lines and Direct Inward Access DIA lines to each telephone DIA lines are assigned and removed in the same manner as other lines l Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordg I Press 7 2 7 6
11. 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals E tns Press Next until the display shows Sys seed dial Press Show The display shows SFeed dial Enter the System speed dial code 001 to 255 a oe Press Show The display shows the number currently assigned to the code or Ho number 8 Press Next until the display shows Burass restr ni 9 Press CHANGE to choose Y Yes or N No 10 Press lt 8 to exit or to continue in programming P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 68 Setting System speed dial Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Naming extensions and lines e Naming extensions 70 e Naming lines 71 P0607110 Issue O1 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 70 Naming extensions and lines Naming extensions You can personalise your office communications by assigning names to lines and extensions in the Modular Plus system The extension default name is the extension number for example Extn 221 The line default name is the line number for example Line B i Names can be seven characters long Line and extension names can contain both letters and numbers but not or To avoid confusion do not assign the same name to two extensions two lines or to both an extension and a line in your system Use creative combinations of initials abbreviations or even nicknames to gi
12. Assigning a number to a System speed dial code First choose a three digit speed dial code from 001 to 255 and then assign a telephone number to it 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 B 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordg 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals E tns Press Next until the display shows Sys seed dial Press Show The display shows SFeed dial Enter the system Speed dial code 001 to 255 Press Show The display shows the number currently assigned to the code or Ho number Press CHAHGE Zane R 9 Enter the telephone number up to 24 digits and press OK Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Setting System speed dial 65 Selecting a line After assigning a telephone number to the speed dial code you must select an outgoing facility for the number to use Choose either a Prime line an exchange line a line pool or the routing table When you programme a line pool as part of a speed dial number use the programme key labelled Intercom and the line pool access code or a programmed line pool key If you assign a specific line to a system speed dial number only telephones with an appearance of that line can use the speed dial number 1 Begin with the display showing the speed dial code you just changed at the end of step 9
13. Route Optimisation is initiated by the system and is transparent to the user However in some cases the user may see a call switch from an appearance on the extension to another appearance key or from an intercom key to the appearance key or vice versa This occurs when Norstar receives a Route Optimisation request and initiates a new call to follow the optimal route Ifan extension is active on a private line call the Route Optimisation call that is being established may go on a public line This will cause the user to loose their private line Data calls are rejected by Route Optimisation in order to ensure the data transmission is not affected Certain situations result in Route Optimisation not taking place For example calls that are using Hold Parking or Camp features will not undergo Route Optimisation and if a Route Optimisation call undergoes diversion the Route Optimisation is dropped Setting Route Optimisation There is no system programming required for the feature when Norstar is working as a terminating PBX Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Digital Private Network Signalling System Number 1 DPNSS 1 311 Message Waiting Indication Message Waiting Indication MWI is a DPNSS 1 feature for Norstar Messages are received at a centralised location an extension you pre determine where they are processed and forwarded to the target extension This centralisation relieves the ne
14. Using restriction filters to bar calls Restrictions are digits that the system does not accept during dialling Overrides are digits that the system accepts in spite of the restrictions Groups of restrictions and overrides are programmed into Restriction filters Rather than define individual restrictions and apply them repeatedly to each telephone and line a restriction filter allows you to apply restrictions as a single package of dialling sequences that are not permitted Different filters can be applied to lines to prevent telephones that share a line from dialling restricted numbers extensions to prevent a specific telephone from dialling restricted numbers acombination of line and extension to allow specific telephones to be exempt from the line filter For example a manager and four employees share a line but the employees have a line extension filter that restricts the calls they can make on that line e ACI15A private circuits to prevent people from using your network to make restricted calls The number of restriction filters that you have for your system depends on a number of factors You may want to have different restrictions for different times of the day such as barring long distance calls after work hours You may want different restrictions for a telephone that clients may use Default filters You may not have to create or change a filter Some of the more popular filters that restrict lon
15. You have entered an invalid line pool code or an invalid destination code You have selected a line that is private to another telephone The destination you have chosen for line redirection is restricted P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 216 About your system telephones Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Customising your telephones Dialling mode 218 e Display contrast 219 e Key Inquiry 219 e Moving line keys 220 e Ring type 221 e Ring volume 221 P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 218 Customising your telephones Dialling mode Business Series Terminals and Norstar telephones support three dialling modes All three methods allow you to dial a call without picking up the handset The special features of the Automatic dial and Predial settings are available only when you dial without picking up the handset Standard dial You make a call by selecting a line and dialling the number If you have a Prime line it is selected automatically when you lift the handset or press the button marked Handsfree Mute Automatic dial lIf you have a Prime line assigned to your telephone you can dial a number without selecting a line Your Prime line is selected as soon as you start dialling a number Automatic dial does not work if your telephone has no Prime line or
16. If the Hunt Group ring pattern priority is higher than the line ring pattern or the ring patterns on member telephones the call will ring at all telephones with the ring pattern specified for the Hunt Group If members of the group have ring patterns assigned to their telephones that are higher than the ring patterns of the incoming line or the Hunt Group then the Hunt Group will use the ring of the corresponding member telephones If the incoming call line has a higher ring pattern assigned than the Hunt Group the Hunt Group will ring with the line ring pattern If the incoming call line has a higher ring pattern assigned than the Hunt Group the Hunt Group will ring with the line ring pattern Follow these steps to set a distinctive ring pattern for a hunt group l S RAA a Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press 2 6 61 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Passwords Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Terminals Extns Press Next until the display shows System Fr9rming Press Show _ The display shows Hunt araurs Press Show _ until the display shows Member extns Press Next until the display shows District Ring HOHE Press CHAHGE to toggle to the ring pattern number you want to assign to the Hunt group line Press to exit or Next to continue programming Modular Plus System Administrati
17. On a Modular Plus system with ETSI ISDN lines Call Forward features have a slight variation in naming convention The functions remain the same Features are labelled as follows Call Forward Unconditional CFU implemented on Norstar CFAC Call Forward on Busy CFOB implemented on Norstar CFB Call Forward on No Response CFNR implemented on Norstar CFNA ISDN external lines use external Call Diversion if this is available from the local exchange User Programming Although users cannot program individual extensions for CFB or CFNA they can program their own extension to CFAC as follows Internal Call Forward Press at any extension followed by the internal number to which you want calls forwarded External Call Forward Press at any extension followed by the route or line pool code number and then the external number Note The destination or line pool code and dialling digits cannot exceed 24 digits The set must have access to a line pool and be programmed to Allow Redirect V under Terminals amp ixtns Restrictions extns to allow external destination programming using Cancelling Call Forward To cancel Call Forward press 4 Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Forwarding calls 271 Forwarding all calls You can temporarily forward your calls to another telephone in the Modular Plus system by using the Call Forward All Calls feature If the telephone to w
18. Programming capabilities 103 If an external call uses a DIA line the call is processed according to the programming of the DIA line If there are no available appearances of the DIA line the caller will hear a busy tone Note When using DND on busy with the M7000 T7000 telephones or a telephone connected to an Analogue Terminal Adapter there is no indication that a second call is ringing on your extension Putting your first call on hold automatically answers the second incoming call If the extension is a member of a hunt group the DND on busy feature overrides the hunt group This extension does not receive notification of hunt group calls while on a call DND on busy is invoked at an extension using See Do Not Disturb on page 224 for information about using this feature Setting and cancelling Do Not Disturb on busy You can set or cancel DND on busy for each extension according to personal preference The default is Y Yes DND on busy is enabled except for extension 221 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fassumordi 3 Press 2 8 J 6 4 6 ADMIN The display shows Terminals Extns 4 Press Show The display shows Show extnt i Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to programme The display shows nnn innr 6 Press Show _ The display shows Line access 7 Press
19. Programming feature settings 135 Park Mode Park Mode allows you to suspend a call and allows someone retrieve the call by entering a retrieval code at any system extension in the system The Park Mode retrieval code is a three digit number By default the first digit of that number is 1 with the possible retrieval codes ranging from 101 to 124 The M7000 T7000 and M7100N T7100 telephone park code is 125 You can determine how the system will assign retrieval codes to all telephones except the M7000 T7000 and M7100 T7100 telephones by choosing one of the following modes Lowest Modular Plus assigns the lowest available retrieval code If there is only one parked call on the system the number is 101 If there are three calls they are assigned 101 102 and 103 Cycle Modular Plus assigns the next available retrieval code in the sequence 101 to 124 If the last parked call was assigned 106 then the next one is assigned 107 If the last retrieval code was 124 then the next code is 101 See Call Parking on page 244 for information about using this feature 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Exths 4 Press Next until the display shows System Fra9rming 5 Press Show The display shows Hunt
20. When you see a numbered symbol 1 it represents the numbers on the telephone keypad A lettered symbol A represents the letters on the telephone keypad represents a telephone key Keys shown like this are found on the telephones around the dial pad Four keys Heading Show F and are labelled on the programming overlay and represent the temporary use of keys during programming A word shown like this K on the second line of a two line display indicates the action for the display key directly below that word All default settings appear in bold in the procedures For example if the default setting is none it appears as None Programming overview Use programming to change default settings as required Default settings for the PBX template are shown in bold in the Programming Map on page 26 Headings and sub headings in programming help you to know where you are Programming has the following main headings Terminals amp Extns Assign settings to each telephone Assign settings to each internal external and DIA rues line vee restrictions for making external calla TaS Sys speed dial as a that can be used by any Passwords ee change passwords for programming and Time amp Date Set the time and date on the system clock Change system wide settings and Hunt Group System prgrming settings Determine System ID number activate additional Software Keys DasS2 DPNSS 1 or PRI lines Main
21. 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals amp extrs Press Show _ The display shows Show extn Enter the extension number of the telephone you want to programme The display shows nnn innr 6 Press three times The display shows Show lines Enter the line number The display shows Lnnn Unassigned Press CHAHGE to change the setting for each line Appr amp Ring Appr only Unassigned or Ring only Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Programming Terminals and Extensions 43 9 Press SCAH to view the lines assigned to this telephone and the setting for each 10 Press gt to exit or to continue in programming In general exchange lines are not assigned to telephones If assigned they are used for monitoring incoming call usage or for making outgoing calls You cannot assign a line that is private to another telephone Each line assigned to appear at a telephone must appear at a key with an indicator on that telephone If you set a line to Ring only incoming calls appear on an intercom key A Central Answering Position CAPN CAP telephone with a CAPN module M7324 or KIM T7316E can provide extra line keys The M7100N T7100 and M7000 T7000 telephones are exceptions They have no line keys and can be assigned any number of lines Ensure that the lines assigned to M7100N T7100 and M7000 T7000 telephones are assigned to ring so that you can detect incoming calls o
22. CONFIG The display shows Passwords 3 Press 2 8 6 4 6 ADMIN The display shows Terninals amp Extrs 4 Press Show _ The display shows Show extnt i Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to programme The display shows nnn innr Press Show _ The display shows Carabilities Press Show _ The display shows Fwd no answers Press Next The display shows Fwd on buss Press Show _ The display shows Fwd tot 10 Press CHANGE and enter the extension number you want to receive the calls Press CLF to change the destination back to Hone 11 Press 68 to exit or to continue in programming Un gt ET ON Programming Do Not Disturb on busy When you are busy on a call and a second call comes in your telephone rings softly to alert you to the second call If you find this second ring distracting you can have the system prevent a second call from ringing by assigning Do Not Disturb DND on busy to your extension When DND on busy is turned on for the extension internal and private network callers hear a busy tone instead of ringing when you are on the telephone External callers are transferred to the Prime extension used in your system If you use DND on busy the line indicator for an external incoming call still flashes but your telephone does not ring Forward on busy takes priority over DND on busy Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01
23. Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 About your system telephones e T7316E Business Series Terminals and KIMs 204 e T7316 Business Series Terminal 207 e M7324N telephone and CAPN 208 e M7310N telephone 209 e M7208N T 7208 telephones 210 e M7100N T7100 telephones 211 e M7000 T 7000 telephone 211 e Release key 212 Visually Impaired Operator Console 212 e Common feature display messages 213 P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 204 About your system telephones Your system telephones allow you to use many features with just a few key presses At the same time you can view what is happening by reading the telephone display if it has one You can choose which of the system features you want to have available make them work the way that suits you best and assign the features you use freguently to the keys on your telephone The current time and date appear on the display of idle display telephones T7316E Business Series Terminals and KIMs The T7316E BST telephone has a two line display three display keys 16 memory keys with indicators eight memory buttons without indicators This keystation has handsfree ability accessed from a button located under the dialpad Also under the dial pad are a mute key that mutes for all features and a headset key which allows the user to attach a
24. Press Show _ The display shows Control extns Press Next _ The display shows Schedule names Press Show _ The display shows Sched 11 Press CHAHGE and enter the name you want to assign to the schedule Press to exit or to continue in programming Changing the time of a schedule It is only necessary to programme the start and stop times for schedules that are activated automatically If you are programming a schedule to start and stop at the same time each day use COP to transfer the settings from one day to the next l 4 5 6 T 8 9 10 11 12 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press 2 6 6 6 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Extns Press Next until the display shows Services Press Show The display shows Ringing service Press Next until the display shows Common settings Press Show The display shows Control extns Press Next twice The display shows Schedule times Press Show _ The display shows Monday Press Show _ The display shows Sched Hight Press Show _ The display shows Start times Press CHAHGE and enter the time you want the schedule to start Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Passwords e Password security 172 e Setting the SAPLUS password 17
25. The display shows Terminals Extns 4 Press Show The display shows Show extrit 5 Enter the extension number of the extension you wish to programme The display shows nnn innr 6 Press Show The display shows Carabilities 7 Press Next until the display shows User rrefernces 8 Press Show The display shows Model followed by a five digit code 9 Press Next until the display shows Language 10 Press CHAHGE to choose English or Opratng 11 Press to exit or to continue in programming Changing the display contrast Display contrast allows you to lighten or darken the telephone display to suit the lighting conditions in your office See Display contrast on page 219 for information about using this feature 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi 3 Press 2 8 J 6 J 4 6 ADMIN The display shows Terminals Extns 4 Press Show The display shows Show extnt i 5 Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to programme The display show hnninnn 6 Press Show _ The display shows Carabilities 7 Press until the display shows User Frefernces P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 118 Programming User preferences 8 9 Press The display shows Mode1 followed by a five digit code
26. e Option Y Yes indicates that Master Registration is turned on Option N No is the default and indicates that Master Registration is turned off 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fassword I 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Exths 4 Press Next until the display shows System Frarming 5 Press Show _ The display shows Hunt 9raurs 6 Press Next until the display shows Comranion 7 Press Show The display shows Registration 8 Press Show The display shows Reaistrationz 9 Press CHAHGE to toggle the setting between Y Yes and N No 10 Press 48 to exit or to continue programming Note To prevent unauthorised cordless handsets from registering on your system leave Master Registration set to N when you are not registering cordless handsets Register the cordless handsets When you have turned on Master Registration you are ready to register individual cordless handsets on the system For information on this procedure see the Cordless Handset Telephone Registration Instructions for your model of cordless handset As you register the cordless handsets you can identify them by putting a sticker customer supplied with the owner s name on each one be careful not to cover the charger contacts or the microphone Modular Plu
27. 6 Enter the line number 7 Press Show The display shows Hame 8 Press Next until the display shows Restrictions 9 Press Show The display shows Restrn filters 10 Press Next The display shows Line restrns 11 Press Show The display shows Hormal 12 Press CHAHGE and use the dial pad to enter the number of the restriction filter to be assigned to the line for each schedule The following table shows the default restrictions Default Filters for extensions Schedule Restriction filter Normal 03 Sched 1 Night 21 Sched 2 Evening 22 Sched 3 Lunch 23 Sched 4 00 Sched 5 00 Sched 6 00 Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Barring calls and privileges Restrictions 87 This means for example that if you enter a set of restrictions for filter 21 they are automatically applied when the Night schedule is in use 13 Press 4 to quit or to continue in programming Assigning filters to a specific line or extension Line extension restrictions allow you to assign a restriction filter to a specific line that can be used for outgoing calls at a specific telephone This type of filter replaces any line or extension restriction filters that might otherwise apply It restricts the numbers you can dial on a line but only from that telephone The same line on another telephone can have different restrictions As with extension restrictions you
28. Call released Call released BRI PRI then released answered busy heard busy heard ringback heard Call answered Call not Call released Call released DASS2 then released answered busy heard busy heard ringback heard DIA Note On redirection of a DASS2 to an ISDN line the ISDN line may not respond within the time required by the DASS2 line This will result in the timing out of the network attached to the DASS2 line and release of the line This is normal operation under this condition In a networked system Line redirection allows you to redirect calls coming in on your external lines to a telephone outside the office You can redirect exchange lines to AC15A private circuits AC15A private circuits to either exchange lines or private circuits and exchange lines to exchange lines How Line redirection is different from Call Forward Call Forward forwards all calls that arrive at a particular telephone to another telephone within the Modular Plus system Line redirection redirects only the lines you specify no matter which telephones they appear on to a telephone outside the Modular Plus system Line redirection takes precedence over Call Forward P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 274 Forwarding calls Using Line redirection When redirecting DIA lines ensure the outgoing resource is a line pool with sufficient lines to support redirecte
29. Extns _ Show F Next Prime line coe a list of Capabilities Show F Next Intercom keys NEA FH Next Answer extns F Show Show extn Next Lines E Shan Show line s A ex Enter line number or Name Next Next Fwd no answer Next k Show Fwd to to go through a list of 1 Services AL the lines I Next Forward Delay User prefernces Show Next Fwd on busy Next Show k Show Fwd to aa k Next DND on busy Next Sys speed dial Name F Next Handsfree ___ Next HF on answerback Restictions 1 gt Show F Next Pickup grp PIN ENex F Next Page zone Net F Next Paging Passwords Restictions Fk Next D Dial Call Services H Show F Next Priority call E S Show F Next Hotline F Next Aux ringer Time amp Date Restrn filters 4 Newt Negiract ring F Next Line restrns Next Receive nes F Next Remote restrns Next ATA settings Next k Show ATA ans timer F Next ATA mode System prgrming Ringing groups F Next ATA tones k Show Sched Night Next ATA use Next Sched Evening ENS intrusi n Next Next Sched Lunch EShow Proiectii Next Sched Sched 4 all Services Call Servi Ringing service EE Next Sched Sched 5 Mai k Next Sched Sched 6 P Next Key prgrming Next Ne F Next CAP KIM key progm Sched Night k Next User speed dial F Next Sched Evenin Software keys Restrn service Show ical Next Call log optns F Next Sched Lunch k Next Dialling opt ns F Next Sched Sched 4 F Next Language miNext piNext F Next Sched Sched 5 F Next D
30. Extns on Lpnnn Assign extns Show extn _ 477 Availabl Loop extn _ None if DTI card DASS2 Card type DASS2 Lines 001 030 031 060 Clock Src Primary Secndry TimMstr if DTI card 1 421 Card type PRI Lines 001 030 031 060 Clock Src Primary Secndry TimMstr if DTI card DPNSS Card type DPNSS Lines 001 030 Clock Src Primary Secndry TimMstr Local num len 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Max Transits 25 Cards on Mod module 3 to 8 CD1 on Mod BRI 2 BRI 4 Loop CD2 on Mod BRI 2 BRI 4 Loop CD3 on Mod BRI 2 BRI 4 Loop if BRI card Loops 301 to 804 Type S T If Type T Protocol Euro BTNR 191 press Show to view Lines on loop If Type S Sampling Adaptve Fixed Extns on Lpnnn Assign extns Show extn _ 477 Availabl Loop extn _ None Maintenance System version Clear lines Port Extn stat Module status Sys test log Sys admin log Network evt log Link guality Provisioning Tests BERT extn tests Loopback tests Diagnostc tools Dialtone detect Line _ System restart Restart system Link status Usage Metrics Hunt groups Show group _ HG lt n gt metrics Clear Time amp Date of last clear Total Calls nnnnn Ans nnnnn nnn Avg ans nnn sec Abn dn nnnnn nnn Busy nnnnn nnn Ovrfl nnnnn nnn Avg Q nnn sec P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 30 System programming introduction Using passwords Programming access i
31. Ho line to use utacina line Pool code _ QUIT Redir by 221 OVERRIDE Redirect denied Select line out QUIT Select linets 3 QUIT ALL Select linets 3 ALL OF Uneauirred line Press or ADL to begin redirection Press or REMOWE to cancel a previous redirection You have one exchange line on your telephone but you need a second line to perform line redirection Redirect your exchange line using a line pool as the outgoing line You are attempting to redirect a line and the line you have chosen is the outgoing line you have selected as a destination You cannot redirect a line to itself Select another line Enter a valid line pool access code You have attempted to redirect a line but someone else has already redirected that line Press or QWERRIDE to override the previous redirection and redirect the line as you wish You can only redirect calls on individual line Select the line that will be used to redirect calls out of the system Press the lines to be redirected To undo a line selection press it again Press ALL to redirect all your lines Continue to press the lines to be redirected Press or k when you are finished The line you are attempting to redirect cannot be redirected because the hardware does not support redirection Modular Plus System Administration Guide 276 Forwarding calls Displays while cancelling redirection Select lineis Press the lines that are no longe
32. Next The display shows Carabilities 8 9 Un Press Show _ The display shows Fwd no answers Press Next twice The display shows DHD an buss 10 Press CHANGE to choose Y yes or N No 11 Press 48 to exit or to continue in programming P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 104 Programming capabilities Programming Handsfree Norstar Business Series Terminal BST telephones allow you to make calls without using the telephone handset When Full Handsfree operation is programmed for a telephone a Handsfree mute key is automatically assigned to the telephone Note The T7208 and T7316 telephones have a separate Mute button The T7316E has separate buttons for both Handsfree and Mute also located under the dial pad Once a telephone has Full Handsfree you can also programme Automatic Handsfree Automatic Handsfree allows you to make and receive Handsfree calls without pressing the designated Handsfree key Note Handsfree is not available on the M7100N T7100 M7000 T7000 telephones or a telephone connected by an Analogue Terminal Adaptor See Using Handsfree on page 233 for information on using this feature 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 6 4 L CONFIG The display shows Fassuordi 3 Press 2 8 J 6 J 4 6 ADMIN The display shows Terminals Estrs 4 Press Show _
33. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi 3 Press 2 8 J 6 J 4 6 ADMIN The display shows Terminals Extns 4 Press Show _ The display shows Show extnt i Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to programme The display shows nnn innr Press Show The display shows Carabilities Press Show The display shows Fwd no answer Press Show The display shows Fwd t rinn Press Next The display shows Forward delauz 10 Press CHAHGE to choose the number of times the telephone rings before it is forwarded 2 3 4 6 or 10 rings 11 Press 48 to exit or to continue in programming Un oe A a P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 102 Programming capabilities Setting Call Forward on busy When a call comes in and you are already engaged on the telephone or when you have Do Not Disturb activated at your telephone Call Forward on busy automatically passes the call to another extension If the extension is a member of a hunt group the Call Forward on busy feature is overridden and the hunt group call will continue to ring until the hunt time has expired A hunt group extension can be a Call Forward on busy extension 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 8 4 4
34. Press Show The display shows the setting for that COS password Press Next until the display shows Line f1lt 11 Enter the number for the restriction that applies to the line when this COS password is used 12 Press 48 to exit or to continue in programming Assigning a remote package to the COS password l a ON EE 10 11 12 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press 2 66 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fassworg Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals eExtns Press Next _ until the display shows Passwords Press Show _ The display shows COS Fsuds Press Show _ The displays shows Show Pswd d t Enter a two digit password 00 to 99 Press Show The display shows the setting for that COS password Press Next until the display shows Remote pkai Press CHAHGE Enter the number of the remote package that applies with this COS password Press to exit or to continue in programming Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Barring calls and privileges Restrictions 91 Assigning a remote access filter People on other systems in your private network can dial into your system over AC15A private circuits or exchange lines and make outgoing calls from your system Therefore you may want to limit the numbers that can be dialled over AC15A private cir
35. Press or QUIT when you are finished moving lines Note You also use this feature code to move hunt group appearances Displays Exchanged The two keys you selected have exchanged position Invalid location You have tried to move a line to a key that cannot be used as a line key such as an intercom key Handsfree Mute key or an Answer key Mowe line from Press the key of the line you want to move Press ALIT or BUIT when you have finished moving lines Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Customising your telephones 221 Ring type Ring volume Move line tot Press the key you want to move the line to Neither QUIT of the keys is erased The lines or the line and feature simply switch places Press a line The key you are trying to move is not a line key If you are trying to switch a line and a feature move the line to the feature key and not the feature key to the line To help you recognise which telephone is ringing in an open office you can choose one of four distinctive rings for your telephone 1 2 Press 6 Press 1 2 3 4 or HEXT You hear the selected ring for two seconds Repeat until you hear the ring you prefer then press or OK The display briefly shows Hew ring stored Note Ring type can be overridden by assigned distinctive ring patterns for lines and Hunt groups if those assigned rings are higher priority 1 2 Press 0 to make the telep
36. change the first line of the display to the current time and date Ho kes free You have no line key free with which to reply to a message Start of list Your are at the beginning of your list of HEST messages Press HET to move through your messages Their list full You are trying to send a message to a user whose message waiting list is full Your list full You have tried to send a message but your telephone list of sent messages is full Cancel one of the messages you have sent if possible or wait until you have received a reply to one of those messages Erasing messages You can erase a message while you are viewing it in your message list On a telephone with a one line display Press On a telephone with a two line display Press ERASE The Direct Dial extension can receive up to four messages and can send up to 30 messages If your reply to a message is forwarded or is answered at another extension using the Call Pickup feature the message remains on your extension until you cancel it or successfully contact the extension that sent the message P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 264 Making internal calls Paging Paging allows you to make announcements over the Modular Plus system using the telephone speakers or your loudspeaker system if one is available The administrator can assign extensions to one of six page zones Making a page announcement 1 Press J
37. receive calls in an evenly distributed method If a call goes unanswered and the hunt group has available agents the system routes the call through the member list until someone answers the call or the queue time out occurs If a queue timeout occurs the system routes the call to the overflow position 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Password E 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Extris 4 Press Next _ until the display shows System Frarmina 5 Press Show _ The display shows Hunt araurs 6 Press Show The display shows Show 9raurt 7 Enter the hunt group number you want to programme 01 30 8 Press Show _ The display shows Member extne 9 Press Next until the display shows Mode 10 Press CHAHGE to set the mode Sequential Cyclic Broadcast 11 Press 68 to exit or to continue programming P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 126 Programming Hunt groups Setting the hunt delay You can programme the number of ring cycles the system allows at a hunt group extension before moving to the next hunt group extension You can estimate the delay in seconds by multiplying the number of rings by six 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 4 4 C
38. sd key To reconnect the held call press sd again This style of telephone does not have a Handsfree Mute key These telephones are commonly used with the Hospitality Services feature Refer to Programming M7000 T7000 memory keys on page 221 for a detailed steps for programming the four memory keys on this telephone P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 212 About your system telephones Release key Pressing ends a call You do not have to put the handset down also ends feature programming While you are on a call do not press to end a feature you are using If you do you disconnect the call Instead press to end a feature Visually Impaired Operator Console The Modular Plus system supports a Visually Impaired Operator Console VIOC for the visually impaired attendant The VIOC provides computer based speech synthesis for the programming interface A VIOC consists of an M7324N telephone a CAPN module an IBM compatible PC a PCI B card a PC based voice synthesiser card and an analogue mixer card The PC uses the PCI B to obtain information from the Central Control Unit CCU and controls the voice synthesiser to generate audible prompts The synthesiser output is routed to a headset where it is coupled with the telephone call in progress enabling the operator to respond to the caller and to hear status information at the same time PCI B is an add on card for the PC t
39. telephones connected to an analogue terminal adapter ATA or to an analogue extension module AEM Room extension A Room extension is a telephone assigned to a room in System programming Up to five telephones can be assigned to the same room they all share the same room number Room extension can be any Norstar BST extension or analogue telephone connected to an ATA or an AEM Hospitality Services admin telephone A HS admin telephone is any two line display Norstar BST extension A HS admin telephone can be programmed to require a user to enter the Desk admin password before access to HS admin features is granted To change the Desk admin password see Hospitality passwords on page 174 Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Programming Hospitality Services 51 Alarm time AL feature The Alarm time feature provides an alarm clock capability on Norstar BST extensions and analogue telephones connected to an ATA Both room extensions and common extensions can be programmed to sound an audible alert at a reguested time One Alarm time within a 24 hour period is programmable on a room or common extension and must be reset daily When the alarm sounds all telephones in a given room alert Cancelling the alarm on any telephone cancels the alarm on all the telephones in the room A new Alarm time entered on a room or common extension overwrites any previously set alarm If the Modular Plus sys
40. the DRPs are overwritten by the telephone settings If the DRPs are set for a line after telephone programming then the telephone ring programming is overridden by the line DRP program Refer to Ring type on page 221 Privacy feature external calls only Lines in your system can be programmed to have automatic privacy If a line is programmed with automatic privacy only one person at a time can use the line If a line is not programmed with automatic privacy anyone with the line assigned to their telephone can join your call by pressing the line key Should another telephone join your call you hear a tone and see a message on the telephone display A telephone cannot join a call without this tone being heard If a line is not programmed with automatic privacy you can still use the privacy feature by pressing after connecting an external call Note Privacy control cannot be used on internal or conference calls Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Answering calls 229 Creating a conference by releasing Privacy Ifa line is programmed with automatic privacy you can turn privacy off to allow another person with the same line to join in your conversation and form a conference All the rules applicable to a conference apply except there is only one line in use instead of the normal two This means that you cannot split a conference 1 After connecting an external call press B 2 Tell the
41. which there are line keys on the telephone you are using Note SLR re uses ETSI Call Diversion when calls come in over ISDN ETSI lines Redirection rules Redirection is allowed or disallowed depending on line type The following table shows which line redirections are permitted in the Modular Plus system Redirection by line type From gt AC15 Loop Loop BRI P To V EarthCallin Unguarde RI DASS2 DIA 0 DPNSS 1 g Guarded d AC15 DPNSS 1 y y y y y Loop EarthCalling y Guarded Loop _ _ Unguarded Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Forwarding calls 273 Redirection by line type continued Sa Bee ea ills fine tse BR DASS2 DIA g Guarded d BRI PRI y y y y y DASS2 y y y y y DIA How line redirection handles a busy condition also depends on the line types in use as shown in the table below Busy condition handling From gt Loop Loo AASL EarthCallin P BRI PRI DASS2 To 4 g Guarded Unguarded Call answered Call not Call not Call not Call not AC15 DPNSS 1 ringback heard answered answered answered answered ringback heard ringback heard ringback heard ringback heard Loop Call answered EarthCalling PUSY heard Guarded Unguarded Call answered Call not
42. you cannot retrieve a parked call or reach a Direct Dial extension by using the Direct Dial digit from an ISDN terminal Digital Network Adapter The Digital Network Adapter DNA is an optional device for use with the Modular Plus CCU It provides an integrated desktop solution for voice data and Computer Telephony Integration CTI services You can also telecommute over a digital telephone line to access high speed network features from your home by connecting to a DNA in your office The DNA serves as a terminal adapter TA and provides reliable high speed end to end digital connectivity between a personal computer and a remote data server through the CCU and public network The DNA uses standard communication protocols such as Point to Point PPP and Multi link PPP MP in applications such as Internet access and remote LAN access A system telephone can also be connected to a DNA to access Modular Plus voice services You can have a conversation at the same time that your computer is connected to the Internet or remote LAN with no loss of CCU features This sharing of voice and data communication is made possible by software in the CCU that provides dynamic bandwidth allocation across the two channels of the connection What this means is both channels are used for data traffic When you use the telephone that is connected to the DNA one channel of the connection is for the voice conversation while the data connection cont
43. 134 e Park Mode 135 e Transfer callback 136 e Network callback 137 e Held line reminder and delay 137 e Conference tone 138 e Directed call pickup 139 e Page tone 139 e Page timeout 140 e Call log space 140 Alarm extension 141 e Answer extension 142 e Setting SWCA controls 143 P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 132 Programming feature settings Background music This feature allows people to listen to music through their telephone speakers providing that an external music source has been installed The default is No which means that background music is disabled See Background music on page 224 for information on using this feature 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi 3 Press Termi 4 Press 5 Press 6 Press 7 Press 8 9 On hold 7 2 7 6 7 SAPLUS The display shows nals Extms Next until the display shows System Frarmina Show _ The display shows Hunt 3rours Next _ until the display shows Featr settings Show _ The display shows Back9rnd musics Press CHAHGE to choose Y Yes or N No Press to exit or to continue in programming You can choose what a caller hears when the call has bee
44. 237 6254 0625 555 3 0162 237 6255 0626 555 3 0162 237 6256 0627 565 All 0173 133 2211 0628 555 3 0162 237 6258 0629 555 3 0162 237 6259 Destination codes with the use of a wild card character Destination Route Absorb DialOut codes Length 062 555 3 0162 237 625X where X is the final dialout digit from 1 to 9 but not 7 0627 565 All 0173 133 2211 P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 166 Programming Services Configuring destination codes Enter a destination code that is recognised when used as part of a telephone number for an outgoing call It can be up to seven digits long 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Extns 4 Press Next until the display shows Seruices 5 Press Show _ The display shows Ringing service 6 Press Next until the display shows Routing service 7 Press Show The display shows Routes 8 Press Next The display shows Dest codes 9 Press Show The display shows Show DstCode 10 If there are no codes defined use ADD the keypad and OK to a new destination code up to 7 To enter a wild card character in the destination code press the AHY display key 11 If there are codes defined press to sel
45. 4 Time and date 327 e Chart 5 Direct Dial 328 e Chart 6 Restriction filters 329 e Chart 7 Remote access packages 330 e Chart 8 Extension restrictions 331 e Chart 9 Extension capabilities 1 332 e Chart 10 Extension capabilities 2 333 e Chart 11 Extension capabilities 3 334 e Chart 12 Extension capabilities 4 335 e Chart 13 User preferences 336 e Chart 14 Extension relocation 337 e Chart 15 Copying settings 338 e Chart 16 ATA settings 339 e Chart 17 Ringing service 340 e Chart 18 Restriction service 340 e Chart 19 Routing service 341 e Chart 20 Passwords 342 e Chart 21 Call log passworde 343 e Chart 22 Call services 344 P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 326 Charts Chart 1 System speed dial Sus speed dial SHOW Speed dial _ Enter a System Speed Dial number from 001 to SHOW The number is displayed Press NEXT Use Prime line Press CHANGE to select outgoing facility Use prime line Use line enter line HEXT Fool code enter pool access code Use routing tabl Disrlay digits Press CHAHGE to choose between Yes and H No HEXT Appears only if Display digits is set to H No Enter a name Hame i HEXT Bypass restr nt Press CHANGE to choose between Ye
46. 6 0 2 Choose a page type or EXTHS through the telephone speakers internal page or SFER through an external speaker external page or BOTH for both internal and external combined page 3 Ifnecessary choose a zone 0 to 6 4 Speak clearly into the handset and make your announcement 5 Press Paging shortcuts Instead of entering the Page feature code followed by the page type you can enter the following shortcut codes Internal EXTHS C J 6 1 and zone 1 to 6 External GPER J 6 2 no zones Combined E0TH J 6 8 and zone 1 to 6 Remote paging To use features on a Modular Plus system remotely press followed by the feature code Even if you are calling from another Modular Plus system press instead of Le J Making a remote page announcement 1 Dial the number to access your Modular Plus system 2 Enter your Class of Service password 3 Press 6 0 4 Choose a page type or EXTHS through the telephone speakers internal page or SFER through an external speaker external page or BOTH for both internal and external combined page 5 If necessary choose a zone 0 to 6 6 Speak clearly into the handset and make your announcement 7 Hang up Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Making internal calls 265 Voice Call Voice Call allows you to make a voice announcement or begin a conversation through the speak
47. Administration Guide Index 348 Call Park 244 Call Pickup directed 234 Call Pickup group 235 Call gueuing 229 Class of service passwords 257 Conference Call 253 Contrast adjustment 117 Dialling modes 218 Do Not Disturb 224 Exclusive hold 240 Group Listen 237 Hold 240 hunt groups 229 Key Inguiry 219 Last Number Redial 95 Line Pool 252 Logit 290 Long tones 296 Paging 264 Pause 296 Personal Speed Dial 225 Priority Call 247 Privacy 228 Programmed Release 297 Recall 297 Remote access packages 182 Ring Again 283 Ring type 221 Ring volume 221 Ringing service 159 Run Stop 297 Saved Number Redial 95 Services 158 Show time 286 Static Time 286 System Speed Dial 279 Time and Date 286 Transfer 247 Voice Call 265 Voice Call deny 265 Wait for dialtone 298 feature codes Analogue Terminal Adapter 321 cordless handsets 320 ISDN terminals 318 Modular Plus 316 feature display messages 213 features Call Forward 269 cordless handsets 320 forwarding calls 271 Call Forward 269 G group answering SWCA keys 230 Group Listen 237 H Handsfree answerback 105 muting 233 programming 104 using 233 Held line reminder 137 Hold automatic 240 exclusive 240 reminder 137 using SWCA keys 230 what a caller hears 132 Hotline assigning a telephone 109 bypassing 109 284 cancelling 109 using 284 hung lines description 198 Hunt Group distinctive ring pattern 124 hunt group calls 229 Hunt groups 119 129 adding and removing
48. Assigning a page zone Page zones give you the advantage of paging different parts of the office without disturbing the entire office You can assign telephones to one of six page zones A zone is any set of Norstar BST telephones that you want to group together for paging regardless of their location The options for this setting are zones 1 2 3 4 5 6 or None no page zone assigned The default is page zone 1 Members of a hunt group can be included in a page zone but hunt group extensions 551 to 580 cannot You can make a telephone part of a page zone only if that telephone has paging set to Yes Make sure that everyone who needs to make page announcements has a list showing the telephones that are in each page zone Keep a master list with your other Programming Records See Paging on page 264 for information about using this feature Note Youcan make an announcement to one person by placing a Voice call Ce 6 6 to that person s telephone 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi 3 Press 2 8 J 6 J 4 6 ADMIN The display shows Terminals Extns 4 Press Show The display shows Show extnt s Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to programme The display shows rninn innr Press twice The display shows Fwd no answer Press until the display shows Page
49. If the 12 hour format is used press to select am or to select pm A tone sounds At the selected times telephones in the room ring to wake up or remind the occupant of the next event or meeting If Music on hold is programmed for the system the occupant will hear music when they answer a wake up call Changing or cancelling an earlier selected Alarm time To set a new time for an Alarm time re enter a new Alarm time The new time overwrites any earlier set time Cancelling the Alarm time for any telephone cancels the Alarm time for all the telephones in the same room Cancelling the alarm To cancel the Alarm time on a display telephone press 6 The display reads Alarm off To cancel the Alarm time on an M7000 T7000 telephone press 8 7 6 To cancel the Alarm time on an analogue telephone press Recall J J JG Turning off the Alarm When a telephone rings at the selected time the occupant can release the Alarm ring as follows Ona Norstar BST extension press any key except e Onan M7000 T7000 telephone press any key except the key Onan analogue telephone lift the handset and then replace it back into position Note Ifthe user presses the key when the telephone rings it temporarily deactivates the Alarm snooze After a number of minutes the telephone will alert again If the user is on a call when the alarm sounds they can press any key except to cancel the
50. Maintenance session 194 Checking the system version of the software 195 System administration log record 195 Troubleshooting 197 Recording and reporting alarm codes 198 Clearing lines 198 Power failure 199 Power fail telephone 200 Troubleshooting a cordless handset 200 SECTION II Using telephone features 202 About your system telephones 203 T7316E Business Series Terminals and KIMs 204 T7316 Business Series Terminal 207 M7324N telephone and CAPN 208 M7310N telephone 209 M7208N T7208 telephones 210 M7100N T7100 telephones 211 M7000 T7000 telephone 211 Release key 212 Visually Impaired Operator Console 212 Common feature display messages 213 Customising your telephones 217 Dialling mode 218 Display contrast 219 Key Inquiry 219 Moving line keys 220 P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide Ringtype 221 Ring volume 221 Programming M7000 T7000 memory keys 221 Using personal features 223 Background music 224 Do Not Disturb 224 Personal Speed Dial codes 225 Using Speed Dial 225 Answering calls 227 Answering a call 228 Sorting calls by distinctive ring patterns 228 Privacy feature external calls only 228 Answering the next queued call 229 Answering hunt group calls 229 Multiple appearances of DIA lines 230 Using SWCA line buttons 230 Using Handsfree 233 Answering a telephone using Directed Pickup 234 Answering a telephone using Pickup Group 235 Answer keys 236 Listening in a gro
51. Netwk callbk 15 30 45 60 90 120 DRT to prime Y DRT delay 1 2 3 4 6 EX EX Tfr Conf Held reminder Y Remind delay 30 60 90 120 150 180 Confrence tone Y Directd pickup Y Page tone Y PageTimeout 15 30 60 120 180 300 600 2700 Auto Time amp Date Y SWCA Cnirls Auto Associate N Invoke by Hold N Call log space Reset all logs Host delay 1000 1000 to 7000 in 500 ms increments AlarmExtn 221 Extn relocatn N EXCH ring Preset Echo PCct delay 200 800 1600 Msg reply enh N Ans Extn Basic Enhanced Extended CLID Match 3 4 5 6 7 8 None Direct dial D Dial 1 Intrnl Extrnl None Intrnl 221 Extrni None CAP KIM assignment CAP1 KIM1 None Access codes Line pool codes Line pool A 9 Line pool B to O None Park prefix 1 6 7 8 None Privaccode None 00 to 99 Exchg code 6 7 8 9 None Direct Dial 0 6 7 8 None Auto None DISA None Remote access Rem access pkgs 00 to 15 Show pkg _ LinePool access Pool A to O N Remote page N Rem line access Show line _ L001 Rem pkg 00 Chnge extn type Show extn _ 477 to 508 Portable ISDN 509 to 540 Portable ISDN Companion Registration Registration Y N Portable extns Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 System programming introduction 29 Show extn _ 477 Available Registrd Radio data Radios Cell Assignment Show radio 011 Unassigned Assigned Antenn
52. Press Next _ The display shows Use 3 Press CHAHGE to Pool A to O Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Programming Services 165 Programming destination codes Dest Codes and wild cards When programming destination codes you can use wild cards as the last number in a destination code string By using wild cards you can reduce the number of destination codes programmed in the system maximizing the distribution of destination codes in the system The wild card character is added to the destination code by pressing the AH display key as the last digit of the code This character represents any digit from 0 to 9 except for digits already programmed or used by other numbering plans Should there be a conflict with other digits already programmed or used with by numbering plans the digit will not be displayed The wild card character can only be used to group destination codes that use the same Route and Absorb Length Given the routes shown in the table below the next two tables show you how to set up destination codes with or without a wild card characters Route DialOut Line Pool 555 0162 237 625 Line Pool C 565 0173 133 2211 Line Pool A Destination codes without the use of a wild card character Destination codes Route Absorb Length DialOut 0621 555 3 0162 237 6251 0622 555 3 0162 237 6252 0623 555 3 0162 237 6253 0624 555 3 0162
53. System Administration Guide 272 Forwarding calls Line redirection Line Redirection or Selective Line Redirection SLR is a telephone feature activated by users within a Modular Plus system This feature allows users to redirect incoming calls to external telephones This feature may be turned on or off as reguired but an extension can redirect only those lines to which it is assigned The incoming trunk must have Disconnect Supervision and the outgoing trunk must be answer supervised for Line Redirection to perform properly Modular Plus supports simultaneous redirections on DIA lines 1f there are enough outgoing lines available Modular Plus detects if the called destination is busy and informs the local exchange so it can provide busy tone to the caller You can redirect exchange lines to AC15A private circuits AC15A private circuits to either exchange lines or private circuits and exchange lines to exchange lines Modular Plus supports simultaneous redirection of DIA calls subject to the same barring rules and depending on the availability of outgoing resources You may choose to redirect all your exchange lines or only some of them You cannot use the Line redirection feature code at M7100N T7100 or M7000 T7000 telephones or at a telephone connected to an Analogue Terminal Adapter You redirect lines at a telephone but once redirected the lines are redirected for the entire system You can only redirect lines for
54. a private network line that does not require you to dial digits you do not need to perform step 3 or 4 5 Select the lines to be redirected using ALL or individual line keys 6 Wait until the line indicators for the selected lines are lit then press or OE If you press or OE before all the lines light up those lines not lit are not redirected The line chosen for redirecting calls on other lines can still be used normally when it is not busy on a redirected call To avoid redirection failing because the chosen line is in use choose a line pool with several lines in it Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Forwarding calls 275 The system does not check that the number you give for line redirection is a valid one If you redirect to an invalid number redirection fails Using an auto dial key to enter the redirection number helps avoid this possibility An auto dial key used for Line redirection must be programmed to use a specific line Cancelling Line redirection 1 Press Ce 4 B 4 2 Select the lines you no longer want to be redirected Ifa telephone has redirect ring enabled it rings briefly for redirected calls on one of its lines even if another telephone set up the line redirection Displays while redirecting lines Intercom You selected the intercom key as the facility to place the call on Enter a line pool code ora destination code Line redirection QUIT ACD REMOWE
55. administrator you may want to programme the system to remind people when a line is being redirected Redirect ring alerts your extension with a brief ring when a call is redirected on one of its lines See Line redirection on page 272 for information on using this feature To allow an extension to use Redirect Ring 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Password 3 Press 2 6 4 6 ADMIN The display shows Terminals Extns 4 Press Show The display shows Show extnt s Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Programming capabilities 111 oe 54 Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to programme The display shows nnn innr Press twice The display shows Fwd no answer Press until the display shows Redirect rings Press CHAHGE to select Y Yes or N No Press to exit or to continue in programming How Line redirection is different from Call Forward Call Forward forwards all calls that arrive at a particular telephone to another telephone within the Modular Plus system Line redirection redirects only the lines you specify no matter which telephones they appear on to a telephone outside the Modular Plus system Line redirection takes precedence over Call Forward Receive tones Analogue eguipment that is connected to the system
56. alarm and maintain their active call Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Programming Hospitality Services 53 Hospitality Services admin alarm feature Only an Hospitality Services HS admin telephone can use the Hospitality Services admin alarm feature The HS admin alarm feature controls only room extensions The Hospitality Services admin feature can query the current or last alarm time set for a room overwrite previous Alarm time programming for a room on the system assign an Alarm time for any room on the system change an Alarm time for any room on the system cancel an Alarm pending for any room on the system To programme the Alarm time for a room with the Hospitality Services admin alarm feature 1 Press on a two line display Norstar BST extension 2 If configured the display reads Pazsuordt Enter the Desk admin password The display reads Al of rm Enter the room number 4 Press WIEW The display shows Alrm 7 8848m OFF 5 If the alarm time is correct press the OHOFF display key to activate the alarm 6 Enter a four digit alarm time If the 24 hour format is used hour 00 to 23 and minutes 00 to 59 no confirmation is required The display shows Alarm hhimm OH If the 12 hour format is used the display shows the four digit time plus AM or FM Press the AM or PH display key The display shows Alarm hhimm am orem OH 7 Press the ke
57. alert at the telephone Your choices are Basic Enhanced and Extended Basic permits the same call coverage allowed in Modular 32 Desktop ISDN Enhanced permits the same call coverage as Modular 32 Desktop ISDN as well as overflow call routing calls but will not permit blind transferred calls Extended permits all call types except priority calls voice calls and other Answer key calls to alert at the telephone A Norstar telephone or Business Series Terminal may have up to eight Answer keys to monitor other extensions See Answer extension on page 142 for information about using Answer keys 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fassword I 3 Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Terminals eExtns 4 Press Next until the display shows System Frarmina 5 Press Show _ The display shows Hunt Grours 6 Press Next until the display shows Featr settings 7 Press Show The display shows Back9rnd musics 8 Press Next until the display shows Ans extni 9 Press CHANGE to select the settings Basic Enhanced and Extended 10 Press 48 to exit or to continue programming Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Programming feature settings 143 Setting SWCA controls This feature allows answered calls to have and maintain an appearance
58. an external call the system can react in one of two ways depending on what settings were specified in system programming the call may be transferred automatically to a free SWCA key when you answer the call In this case you need to put the call on Hold to free the line the call came in on you may need to press the a free SWCA button to transfer the call manually to a free SWCA key In this case when you transfer the call the line the call came in on is released When you puta call on hold the system can react in one of two ways if you have SWCA keys defined when you put the call on Hold the call transfers to a SWCA key and all the other extensions with corresponding SWCA keys display a flashing indicator beside the button The call can be picked up at any other extension when you put the call on Hold it stays on hold on the line that it came in on To make the call available to other extensions press a free SWCA key Calls with appearances on SWCA keys show a solid indicator when the call is active On the extension where the call is active an Intercom or Line button also becomes active for the call P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 232 Answering calls SWCA indicators call status states auto assign Call is answered and automatically assigns to a SWCA key Call is put on Hold Call is taken off Hold The SWCA indicator flashes at all Indicator app
59. and connects your call If Call Forward is active at the telephone you are trying to reach your call is forwarded If the telephone receiving the Priority call is in a conference call the other two parties are automatically put on hold when the Priority call is accepted If the extension is a hunt group the Priority call is rejected Transferring a call You can transfer a call to any internal or external number Depending on how the Installer has programmed your system you may not be able to transfer a call on one exchange line to another exchange line 1 Press 0 or press TEAHSFER 2 Call the person you want to transfer the call to 3 If you want to talk to the person you are transferring the call to wait for them to answer before proceeding 4 When you are ready to complete the transfer press OK or hang up You do not have to wait for the person to answer You can cancel a transfer and reconnect with the party you are attempting to transfer at any time before the transfer is complete 1 Press 0 or press CAHCL 2 Ifyou are not reconnected press C and then press the line key of the original call which is now on hold P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 248 Routing calls Transferring to a busy extension Call Camping You can send an external call to another extension even though all of its lines are busy by camping the call The Call Camping feature is useful for peo
60. appear on intercom keys if they are available More than one attendant may have an Answer key for a single telephone This allows two or more attendants to handle calls for a busy person Each telephone can handle calls for up to four other people using separate Answer keys for each person Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Answering calls 237 Listening in a group The Group Listen feature allows other people in your office to listen in on a call without the caller hearing any noise from the office because the telephone external microphone is off 1 Press 0 2 You hear the caller through your telephone speaker 2 Speak to the caller through the telephone handset To cancel the Group Listen feature during your call press 0 2 Group Listen is cancelled automatically when you hang up the call You can switch a Group Listen call to handsfree by pressing the key labelled Handsfree To switch back to Group Listen enter the Group Listen feature code again Note Keep the handset away from the speaker or you may hear feedback Press to prevent feedback when hanging up Disconnecting Accidentally If you accidentally drop the handset into the telephone cradle while answering a call you can retrieve the call by picking up the handset The system calls on the Handsfree feature which keeps the call active Malicious call identification MCID The MCID feature allows you to use
61. by entering no digits in step 8 the password is erased If you erase the password anyone can enter programming without a password Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Passwords 173 Setting the Administrator password The Administrator password is one to six digits long and allows you to access programming The default password is 2 8 6 4 6 which spells ADMIN on the dial pad l 00 ON a Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press 2 6 6 6 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi Press 7 2 7 6 6 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Extns Press Next _ four times The display shows Passwords Press Show _ The display shows COS Fsuds Press Next until the display shows Frogrming Fswds F Press Show _ until the display shows 515 admini Press CHAHGE and enter the new password Press OK to accept the new password Erasing the Administrator password If you leave the Administrator password blank by entering no digits in step 8 the password is erased If you erase the password anyone can enter Administrator programming without a password Setting the Basic password The Basic password is one to six digits long and allows you to access some programming settings using feature codes You cannot enter regular programming with this password The default is 2 2 7 4 which s
62. code 256 Press Next to search through all the speed dial codes Press Show when you see the code you want to change Press CHANGE and enter the telephone number the same way you would dial it on the telephone Press OK Press and choose the line or enter a code for a line pool that the speed dial code should use Press to exit or to continue in programming Changing the Call log options See Call log on page 288 for information about using this feature l Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press 2 6 6 6 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Password Press 2 6 6 4 6 ADMIN The display shows Terminals Extns Press Show _ The display shows Show extrz P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 116 Programming User preferences 5 9 10 11 12 Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to programme The display shows nnn innr Press Show The display shows Carabilities Press Next until the display shows User Frefernces Press Show _ The display shows Mode1 followed by a five digit code Press Next until the display shows Call log oFt ns Press Show _ The display shows Ha one answered Press CHAHGE to choose No one answered Unanswerd by me Log all calls or No autologging Press to exit or to continue in programming Changing the Dialling
63. display shows Room desk info Press Next until the display shows Serwice time Press Show _ The display shows Hour 44 Press the CHAHGE display key and enter the hour 00 to 23 If the number is less than 13 the display shows AM Press CHANGE to select FM Press Next The display shows Minutes 44 Press the CHAHGE display key and enter the minutes 00 to 59 Press the key to exit programming P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 58 Programming Hospitality Services Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Software Keys e Viewing the system ID 60 e Software Keys 60 P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 60 Software Keys Viewing the system ID You can view the system ID during a programming session in Software Keys 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordg I 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals amp extrs 4 Press until the display shows Software Keys 5 Press The display shows Ss ID followed by the unique system ID number 6 Press to exit or to continue in programming Software Keys Software Keys are provided by your system installer You are given three keys passwords consisting of eight digits each
64. headset and direct the call to the headset or the handset without needing to disconnect the headset Line numbering starts on button 09 T7316E The default button assignments for the T7316E depend on the template applied Refer to your Programming Records to identify the current button programming for each telephone or group of telephones T7316E BST upper buttons PBXtemplate PBX template 01 Contrast_ 05 02 Show Time 06 03 4 07 Send Ms 04 6 08 Speed diai Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 About your system telephones 205 Hybrid template Square template 01 Contrast 05 Saved No 01 Contrast 05 Svd N redial 02 Show Time 06 Sys Park 02 Show Time 06 Sys Park 03 Privacy 07 Send Msg 03 Privacy 07 Send Msg 04 08 Speed dial 04 08 Speed dial T7316E BST lower buttons PBX template 09 Sys Park 17 Call Timer 10 Saved No 18 Ring Again 11 Call Fwd 19 DND 12 Pick Up 20 Conf Trans 13 Page 21 Last No 14 Transfer 22 Voice Call 15 Time Date 23 Intercom 16 Receive msd 24 Intercom Sguare template Hybrid template 09 Line lt xx gt 17 Call Timer 09 Line lt xx gt 17 Call Timer 10 Line lt xx gt 18 Ring Again 10 Line Pool 18 R
65. hear when the other person speaks If Automatic Handsfree has been assigned to your telephone you can use the Handsfree Mute feature instead of Listen on Hold Without handsfree 1 Press 2 Hang up the handset 3 Press the line key of the call You may hear indications from the far end that you are on hold for example tones or music Your telephone microphone is off so no one at the other end can hear anything in your office 4 When the person you were talking to returns you hear them through your telephone speaker Lift the handset and talk With handsfree 1 If using the handset press the key labelled Handsfree 2 Hang up the handset 3 Press the key labelled Handsfree again Your microphone is off but you can hear when the caller returns 4 When the caller returns press the key labelled Handsfree or lift the handset P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 242 Holding calls Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Routing calls e Call Parking 244 e DIA calls 245 Making a Priority call 247 Transferring a call 247 e Transferring to a busy extension Call Camping 248 P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 244 Routing calls Call Parking Call Parking allows you to suspend a call so that someone else can retrieve it from any telephone in the Modular Plus system You retri
66. include Auailble the extension number is available for cordless handset registration Unawailble registration has been disabled for that extension number Registered a cordless handset is currently registered on the extension number and another cordless handset cannot be registered on it The extension number must be de registered from the registered handset to make it available Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fassword I Press 7 2 7 6 J 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Extns Press Next until the display shows System erarmind Press Show The display shows Hunt Srours Press Next until the display shows Companion P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 190 Adding cordless capability 7 Press Show _ The display shows Registration 8 Press Show _ The display shows Registrations 9 Press Next The display shows Portable extns 10 Press Show _ The display shows Show extr ts 11 Enter the extension number The display shows the registration status for this extension 12 Press 48 to exit or to continue programming De registering an extension number for a cordless handset To register a cordless handset on an extension number that has another handset registered against it you must first de register that extension num
67. its programming for a period of three days Telephones also keep their personal programming The clock always needs to be set to the correct time after a power failure P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 200 Troubleshooting Power fail telephone Each analogue line card installed in either the Modular Plus Central Control Unit CCU or a Line Module provides one power fail telephone connection at the Box Connection ATTENTION power fail lines not supported The following line cards do not support power fail telephone lines NTBB1202 LM with auto ranging power supply These versions of LMs do not support emergency telephones NTBB20AD 93 UK Class B LM NTBB20AE 93 Australia LM NTBB20FD 93 Eng Fr LM NTBB20FF 93 Cala LM NTBB20FG 93 International LM The power fail telephone is an analogue telephone that functions independently of the Modular Plus system You can use the power fail telephone only when your Modular Plus system is disconnected or without power The power fail telephone is usually located near the Modular Plus CCU If there is no power fail telephone next to the CCU plug a standard analogue telephone into the power fail telephone socket located near the CCU The power fail telephone facility is not supported on a BRI loop Modular Plus customers with digital exchange lines who require power fail telephones have the following options add analogue exchange lines to
68. line do not use the DND on Busy feature If an extension is a member of a hunt group and the extension activates this feature the extension will not receive notification of incoming hunt group calls while on a call See Programming Do Not Disturb on busy on page 102 Forward on busy When you already have a call ensure that other calls to your extension are answered Forward the additional calls to an extension that you know will be monitored For example Miss Vale works with Mr Cassidy as a team They answer each other s calls Forward on busy is set for the extension of the other person When Mr Cassidy is busy on a call other calls to his extension are forwarded immediately to Miss Vale If your extension is a member of a hunt group the Call Forward on busy setting is overridden by the hunt group routing See Setting Call Forward on busy on page 102 Forward no answer When you are away from your extension ensure that calls are answered by forwarding to an extension that you know will be monitored For example Miss Vale works with Mr Cassidy as a team They make sure that one of them is always in the office Forward No Answer is set for the extension of the other person When Miss Vale is away from her extension calls are forwarded immediately to Mr Cassidy If your extension is a member of a hunt group the Call Forward no answer setting is overridden by the hunt group routing See Setting Ca
69. members 121 and videophones 120 assigning lines 123 Call Forward No Answer feature 101 Call Forward on Busy feature 102 Call Park feature 244 checking metrics 129 distributing hunt group calls 125 Do Not Disturb on Busy feature 103 member order 122 naming the group 128 overflow extension 128 programming hunt delay 126 routing calls if all members are busy 126 time in queue 127 Hybrid template Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Index 349 T7316E buttons 205 hybrid template T7316 buttons 208 l incoming calls SWCA keys 231 intercom keys programming 45 using for Autodial 279 interrupting a call See Priority Call Invoke by Hold 143 ISDN terminals applications 300 Call Forward All Calls 319 Direct Dial 78 feature codes 318 features 300 line access 253 supported services 301 transfer call 319 using 253 K key assignments M7100 telephone 211 Key Inquiry 219 keys Autodial 279 Call Log 291 display 18 keypad 15 18 labelling 220 moving 220 programming 114 telephone 15 KIM CAP line assignment 43 CAP station 205 T7316E defaults 204 L language display 117 VIOC 117 Last Number Redail preventing 95 Line assigning filters 86 assigning to an extension 42 naming 71 number of appearances 43 line access ISDN terminals 320 line appearances using SWCA keys 230 Line pool and OLI 48 feature 252 Line pool access programming 44 Line Redirection cancelling 275 using 274 Line r
70. mode that was used for the last call For instance if you use a headset to receive a call the next call defaults to the headset Assigning a Pickup group The Call pickup feature allows you to pick up calls that are ringing at another telephone in your Pickup group You can assign telephones into one of four Pickup groups Options for this setting are 1 to 9 and None The default is None Telephones can be put into and taken out of any Pickup group See Answering a telephone using Directed Pickup on page 234 for information on using this feature A hunt group call ringing at an extension that is a member of a Pickup Group can be picked up by any extension in that Call Pickup Group 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Password 3 Press 2 8 6 4 6 ADMIN The display shows Terninals amp Extris P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 106 Programming capabilities 4 Press Show The display shows Show extnt i 5 Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to programme The display shows nnn innr 6 Press twice The display shows Fwd no answer 7 Press until the display shows Fickur 9rF 8 Press CHAHGE to assign the telephone to Pickup Group 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 or None 9 Press to exit or to continue in programming
71. of service COS passwords permit controlled access to system resources by internal and remote users When you enter a COS password at a telephone the restriction filters associated with your COS password apply rather than the normal restriction filters Similarly when a remote user enters a COS password on an incoming Auto Answer line the restriction filters and remote package associated with their COS password apply rather than the normal restriction filters and remote package COS passwords are programmed by either your Customer Sales Support Officer or installer Users should memorise their COS passwords instead of writing them down Employees COS passwords should be deleted when they leave the company Typically each user has a separate password However several users can share a password or one user can have several passwords Changing your COS password You must enter a COS password each time you wish to make a call that is normally restricted on a line or telephone Changing the restriction filters on a line or telephone 1 Press 6 J 2 Enter your six digit COS password P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 258 Making external calls COS passwords allow you to define individual passwords and determine the restriction filters and remote package associated with each If you use your Modular Plus system from outside the office you may have to enter a COS password to gain access to
72. of the previous procedure 2 Press Next _ The display shows Use Prime line 3 Press CHAHGE to choose Use prime line Use routing tbl Use line or Pool code Stop pressing CHAHGE when you see the line you want to use for the speed dial 4 Press lt to exit or to continue in programming Setting the speed dial to display a name When you use a speed dial code you can choose to have the display show either the telephone number or a name For example you could programme a speed dial for a frequently used courier and have the display show Courier instead of the telephone number System speed dial names can be 16 characters long The default is set to display the number Alpha tagging If you specify a name for a system speed dial and your system is set up for CLI display an incoming call on a number only CLI line that matches the system speed dial number will display whatever name you entered into the system speed dial name field This is referred to as alpha tagging You can determine how many digits of the incoming call and the number entered into the system speed dial must match before the system determines that the numbers are the same Refer to CLID Match on page 144 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fassword I 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals amp extrs 4 Pre
73. on a SWCA key at all telephones with the same defined SWCA keys When the call is placed on Hold the incoming line is freed up for the next call Up to 16 System Wide Call Appearance keys can be assigned to each extension in a group You can program the telephone keys while you are setting up the telephones or the user can assign this feature to keys with a display at any time However all extensions in an answer group should have the same keys assigned to the same SWCA feature code SWCA keys can be assigned to memory keys using feature code to define a key with one of these codes wyg t CEE B BB On the system under Feature Settings SWCA Crit you define how incoming calls get associated to SWCA keys and how Hold will handle the calls The Auto Associate setting determines if answered calls will automatically be assigned to SWCA keys Auto Associate V If you want the user to press the Hold button or a free SWCA key before the call transfers to a SWCA key set Auto Associate toH Calls remain assigned to SWCA keys for the duration of the call The Invoke bs Hold setting determines if a SWCA call put on Hold can be picked up from other extensions in the group Ifyou want the call to be available to be picked up by other members of the groups when you put a call on Hold set Invoke b s Hold to A flashing indicator appears beside the SWCA key when the call assigned to that key is put on Hold Ifyou want calls to remain on H
74. one of these 16 codes eJ 6 2 B to LeIFI6JBI B You can also assign a number of these codes to memory buttons with indicators to any group of telephones In which case calls can be parked on the memory buttons and are visible and can be retrieved at other extensions by pressing the corresponding button See Setting SWCA controls on page 143 Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 System programming introduction 39 Making suggestions Advice Line Please submit your comments and suggestions to British Telecommunications Norstar Product Manager Weston House 246 High Holborn London WCIV 7DQ UK If you have difficulty programming or using a system feature refer to the description of the feature and follow the appropriate procedures If you still have difficulty call the Advice Line at 0800 378822 P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 40 System programming introduction Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Programming Terminals and Extensions e Terminals amp Extensions 42 e Assigning a line to an extension line access 42 e Assigning line pool access 44 e Assigning a Prime line to an extension 44 e Assigning intercom keys to an extension 45 e Assigning an Answer key to an extension 46 e Setting the Originating Line Identification for an extension 47
75. personal programming Personal programming includes the settings programmed by people at their own telephones using feature codes You can only copy personal programming between telephones of the same type when both are plugged into the system See Chart 15 Copying settings on page 338 in Appendix A for a programming overview P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 148 Moving and copying Copying system programming to a single extension Pressing the COFY softkey allows you to copy programming from one telephone to another telephone to a range of telephones or to all telephones in the system l 10 11 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press 2 6 6 6 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fassward Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Extns Press and enter the extension number whose programming you want to copy Press COF The display shows Cors S54 STEM data Press CHAHGE to toggle between SYSTEM data to copy the programming of the system and SYSTEM HISER to copy the programming of the system and the programming of a particular extension Press Next The display shows CorsiSIHGLE Press Next The display shows Cory tai Enter the extension number of the telephone that will be programmed The display shows nnn gt nnn briefly then returns to Cory toi Keep enterin
76. phone 232 Pickup group setting up 105 Prime line assigning to an extension 44 Priority Call allowing 108 feature 247 Privacy 228 Programming 99 programming copying 147 map of Administrator programming 20 overlay 14 programming basics entering passwords 19 map using Installer password 30 pulse dialling 298 Q queued call 229 R re allocating log space 140 Recall preventing 96 Receive tones 111 receiver volume programming 133 redialling a number 281 Redirect preventing 97 Redirect ring setting up 110 turning off 110 Redirection 305 Redirection rules 272 Registration password 175 187 regulatory information 12 relocation of extension 146 Remind delay 137 Remote access defaults for packages 182 filter 91 packages 182 Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Index 351 Remote paging 264 restricted calls See Barring calls ring Ringing service 159 Ring Again cancelling 283 feature 283 ring pattern Hunt Group 124 Ring type changing 118 feature 221 Ring volume feature 221 ringing distinctive ring patterns 228 Ringing service activating 159 cancelling 159 feature 159 Route optimization 305 routing DIA calls 245 Routing service programming 161 programming DestCode 165 programming DialOut 164 Run Stop 297 S SAPLUS password 172 Saved Number Redial preventing 95 schedule changing name 170 changing time 170 Selective Line Redirection 272 Services Control extensi
77. protection None Low Med or High 10 Press 48 to exit or to continue in programming Un asas Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Digital Private Network Signalling System Number 1 DPNSS 1 309 Call Offer Displays Call Offer over DPNSS 1 allows a calling party to indicate to the wanted party that there is an incoming call available even though that line is busy The intended recipient can ignore accept or decline the offered call Call Offer is useful in increasing the call coverage capability of a Norstar system and helps to lift the network processing load It is a receive only capability on Norstar incoming calls would be initiated at another PBX on the DPNSS 1 network An example of Call Offer in use is an operator or attendant having a number of calls coming in at once Note DND on busy must be programmed to H under Terminals amp Extns gt Carabilities for an extension to accept Call Offer When a Call Offer is made by the originating exchange the target extension displays a message and a tone is heard When an offered call arrives on extensions with line display the user will see faa Wt if the calling party ID is available and CLID is enabled otherwise Line 444 waiting is shown the line name associated with the call If there are more than 11 digits in the incoming number only the last 10 will display If Call Queuing is programmed for the system see An
78. rrrrr Vacant Press the CHAHGE display key and select the required status for the room extension Vacant Basic Mid or Full The default setting is Vacant 5 To programme other rooms press the FIME or HEXT display key and return to step 3 If no more rooms require programming press the key to exit programming Note Programming a room to Vacant state cancels any outstanding alarms Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Programming Hospitality Services 55 Room condition RC The Room condition RC feature allows users to exchange information about the serviced state of a room Users are front desk attendants and cleaning or maintenance personnel of an establishment The RC feature is not available from a common extension The Modular Plus system maintains a database of the state of each room This database is accessed from either the room extension or a Hospitality Services admin telephone You can set a Room Condition password to limit access to this features See Room condition password on page 174 Room extensions can set the associated room state to Service done Srvc done set the associated room state to Needs service Heads sruc query the state of the associated room on a telephone with a display Hospitality Services admin telephones can set any room state to Service done Srvc done set any room state to Needs service Heads Srvc query the state of any ro
79. telephone You also can transfer a call to a hunt group extension Depending on how the system was programmed you may not be able to transfer a call on one exchange line to another exchange line Depending on the type of ISDN terminal you may have to press a service key to access feature services consult the instructions that came with your ISDN terminal 1 Press 7 0 J 2 Enter the number of the extension you want to transfer the call to followed by f 3 Enter the appropriate key to send Cancelling Transfer Depending on the type of ISDN terminal you may have to press a service key to access feature services consult the instructions for your terminal 1 Press 0 2 Enter the appropriate key to send P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 320 Feature guick reference Line access from an ISDN terminal Note that ISDN terminals do not have line keys or intercom keys as do BST and Norstar telephones To make an outgoing call from an ISDN terminal access an exchange line by entering a line pool code or a destination code Making or receiving calls involving two B channels For incoming calls that reguire two simultaneous B channels Modular Plus reguires that calls be made seguentially to two distinct numbers rather than simultaneously to the same number In the case of a DIA call the same DIA line can be used but the ISDN extension needs to have the number of appearanc
80. the amount of disruptive background noise being transmitted In open concept environments use the handset when handsfree communication is not necessary or when you need privacy during a call Another option is to use a headset Answering a telephone using Directed Pickup You can answer any telephone that is ringing in your Modular Plus system using Directed Pickup or Group Pickup 1 Press 7 6 2 Enter the extension number of the ringing telephone Directed Pickup cannot be used to answer private lines To use Directed Pickup the telephone must be ringing If for example the auxiliary ringer is ringing but the call is not ringing at a telephone the call cannot be answered using Directed Pickup It must be answered normally at a telephone that has a flashing indicator for the call or by using Trunk Answer You can also answer a call that is ringing when someone has transferred the call to a telephone and the call is ringing on an intercom key Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Answering calls 235 Directed Pickup can also retrieve calls that are ringing on an Answer extension number Although you may enter the extension number of the telephone you hear ringing it may be calls from another telephone you are answering Answering a telephone using Pickup Group Your Modular Plus system can be divided into nine Pickup Groups If you are a member of a Pickup Group you can pick up a ca
81. with an analogue terminal adapter external or internal responds only to tone dialling signals If you have analogue eguipment connected to an extension set Receive Tones for that extension to Yes Otherwise leave Receive Tones set to No l Un 2 2 Se OS Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fassuordi Press 2 6 4 6 ADMIN The display shows Terminals Extns Press Show _ The display shows Show extr Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to programme The display shows nnn innr Press twice The display shows Fwd no answer Press until the display shows Receive tones Press CHAHGE to choose Y Yes or N No Press to exit or to continue in programming P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 112 Programming capabilities Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Programming User preferences e Programming User preferences 114 e Changing the key programming for an extension 114 e Changing a Personal user speed dial code 115 e Changing the Call log options 115 e Changing the Dialling options 116 e Changing the display language 117 e Changing the display contrast 117 e Changing the Ring type 118 P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System A
82. you can programme your most experienced personnel to be the first members of the group to receive incoming calls The cyclic distribution starts the call at the extension following the one which was last presented with a call So if extension 223 224 and 225 are members 001 002 and 003 respectively of a hunt group P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 230 Answering calls and the last call was answered by 224 member 002 the next incoming call will start with extension 225 member 003 This way you can ensure that all your personnel are receiving calls rather than one person receiving the majority of calls Multiple appearances of DIA lines DIA lines can be assigned to one or more telephones Calls on DIA lines alert at all telephones programmed with appearances of the DIA line Once the DIA call is answered the call is no longer tracked by any other telephone with the appearance of the DIA line leaving the other telephones free to receive subseguent incoming calls Using SWCA line buttons This feature allows a call to maintain an appearance on the System Wide Call Appearance SWCA buttons to a group of users for the life of the call SWCA codes can be assigned to up to 16 program buttons on each telephone in a group See Changing the key programming for an extension on page 114 for general information about setting or changing key programming for a telephone SWCA keys can be assigned to m
83. zone Press CHANGE to assign page zone 1 2 3 4 5 6 or None Press to exit or to continue in programming Nn ND Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Programming capabilities 107 Allowing paging 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Passard 3 Press 2 8 J 6 J 4 6 ADMIN The display shows Terminals Extns 4 Press Show The display shows Show extnt s Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to programme The display shows nnn innr Press twice The display shows Fwd no answer Press until the display shows Paging Press CHAHGE to choose Y Yes or N No Press to exit or to continue in programming Un nn Assigning telephones to the Direct Dial extension Direct Dial allows you to dial a designated extension in your Modular Plus system or private network with a single digit For example the Direct Dial digit is the digit you dial to reach an attendant in your office The Direct Dial digit is an internal or external number that the system automatically dials when someone enters the Direct Dial digit The Modular Plus system allows for up to five Direct Dial extensions person whose telephone is a Direct Dial extension is usually a receptionist for your entire office or for a particular department To
84. 0 Issue 01 Setting System speed dial e Setting System speed dial 64 e Assigning a number to a System speed dial code 64 e Selecting a line 65 e Setting the speed dial to display a name 65 e Setting the speed dial number to bypass restrictions 67 P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 64 Setting System speed dial Setting System speed dial Speed dial saves time by allowing you to dial freguently called numbers using a three digit code For example you can programme telephone numbers for major suppliers or clients for easy dialling by everyone in the office Speed dial codes numbered from 001 to 255 are intended for system wide use Speed dial codes from 256 to 279 are for personal use and can be programmed differently at each telephone See Changing a Personal user speed dial code on page 115 for more information on the Speed dial feature The steps to programming System speed dial are assign a number to a System speed dial code select an outgoing facility to be used for the number set whether the system displays the number or a name optional set whether the speed dial number bypasses any restrictions on the line or telephone where it is used optional See Chart 1 System speed dial on page 326 of Appendix A for a programming overview See Using Speed Dial on page 225 for information on using the System speed dial feature
85. 2 e Setting the Administrator password 173 e Setting the Basic password 173 e Hospitality passwords 174 e Setting the Registration password 175 P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 172 Passwords Password security You can and should change your passwords regularly for security reasons Keep a record of your passwords in a secure place and remember the longer the password the more likely it is to be secure See Chart 20 Passwords on page 342 in Appendix A for a programming overview Setting the SAPLUS password The System Administrator plus password is one to six digits long and allows you to access all of the programming needed to set up the system for your company The default password is 7 2 7 8 7 which spells SAPLUS on the dial pad l S 2 TN ON OT Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Extns Press Next _ four times The display shows Passwords Press The display shows COS Fswds Press Next until the display shows Progrming Fswds Press Show _ The display shows SysAdmint Press CHAHGE and enter the new password Press OK to accept the new password Erasing the SAPLUS password If you leave the SAPLUS password blank
86. 48 hours Map of Administrator Plus programming The programming map on the following pages shows the headings sub headings and settings that you can view when you access the programming menus by pressing 2 6 6 4 4 CONFIG and entering the Administrator Plus password 7 2 7 6 6 7 SAPLUS Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Introduction 21 Programming map Administrator Plus Line assignment k Show Show line Show extn Show H Line access H Show P Next Line Pool access nter extension or ow Line Poo E i I Show Line Pool A INA Next I Next Line Pool B to O Terminals amp
87. 4N M7100N T7000 T7316E KIM Key prgrming T7000 1 key f M7100N 1 key f M7208N 8 keys M7310N 10 24 keys M7324N 24 keys f T7316E KIM 16 8 24 keys per KIM KIM key prgrming KIM1 User speed dial Call log opt ns No one answered Unanswerd by me Log all calls No autologging Dialling opt ns Automatic dial Predial Standard dial Language English Opratng Display cntrst 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Ring type 1 2 3 4 Restrictions extns Restrn filters 00 99 Show filter _ Restrn fit 00 No restrictions Restrn flt 01 Restrn 01 0 Deny 0 Override 01 0800 Restrn 02 1 Deny 1 No overrides Restrn fit 05 Restrn 01 010 Deny 010 No overrides Restrn 02 1 Deny 1 No overrides Restrn 03 00 Deny 00 No overrides Restrn fit 06 Restrn 01 lt ANY gt Deny lt ANY gt No overrides Extn restrns Filters Normal 02 Night 11 Evening 12 Lunch 13 Sched 4 00 Sched 5 00 Sched 6 00 ExtnLock None Partial Full Allow last no Y Allow saved no Y Allow recall Y Allow redirect N Line extn rstrn Show line _ Normal None Night None Evening None Lunch None Sched 4 None Sched 5 None Sched 6 None Call services Auto call info Show line _ Call log set N Default for DIA Y Extl VMsg set N 1stDisplay Name Numb Line Auto called ID N Log space Log 0 Pool 600 Show line Lines Line data BRI ST lines 001 to 008 031 to 038 061 to 234
88. 9 Press Show The display shows Feud followed by the number you chose and the current password Press The display shows User flt and the current setting If you are changing the user filter press CHAHGE The display shows User fltri Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Barring calls and privileges Restrictions 93 11 Enter the two digit number of an existing dialling filter or leave blank to return to the default filter 12 Press The display shows Line f ltr and the current filter assigned 13 If you are changing the line filter press CHAMGE The display shows Line fltri 14 Enter the two digit number of an existing dialling filter or leave blank to return to the default filter 15 Press 48 to exit or to continue in programming Erasing an existing COS password When a COS password is no longer needed you can erase it 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Password I 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Extrs Press Next until the display shows Passwords Press Show The display shows COS Fauds Press Show The display shows Show Pswd 3 Enter the password number of the COS password you want to erase 00 to 99 8 Press The display shows Psud followed by the number you chose and current password 9 Pr
89. Dial digit the default Direct Dial number is 0 The Direct Dial digit is an internal or external number that the system will automatically dial when someone enters the Direct dial digit A person whose extension is a Direct Dial extension is usually a receptionist for your entire office or for a particular department The Direct Dial extension can send up to 30 messages and can invoke Services to activate the extra dial telephone You can divert calls to a Direct Dial extension that is outside your Modular Plus system if the Direct dial programming has been set to use a routing table or a prime line where the prime line is set to Intercom Note ISDN terminals cannot use the Direct Dial digit to reach a Direct Dial extension Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Making internal calls 261 Leaving Messages You can leave a message on the display of another telephone in your Modular Plus system Messages appear on the telephone display informing the recipient to call the person who sent the message Messages can only be sent within the Modular Plus system The message sent reads M5G Analogue telephones attached to an ATA cannot receive messages but can send them Direct Dial extensions can send up to 30 messages Only Direct Dial extensions can send messages to M7000 T7000 telephones and telephones attached at an ATA Sending a message 1 Press Ce fi 2 On a telephone with a two line display
90. H No HEAT ATA use i Press CHANGE to choose between On site and Off site P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 340 Charts Chart 17 Ringing service Services Ringing service SHOW Ringing grours HEXT 5ched Hiaht l SHOW Service Press CHAHGE to select from Manual i Auto and Off Chart 18 Restriction service Services Ringing service T 5 HEXT Restrn service SHOW Sched Hight SHOW Service Press CHAHGE to select from Manual Auto and Off i Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Charts 341 Chart 19 Routing service Services SHOW Ringing service HEXT 2 times Routing service SHOW Routes MEST Dest codes MEST Sched Hight Press CHANGE to select from Marual Auto and Off P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 342 Charts Chart 20 Passwords Passwords SHOW COS Pswds Appears only if using SAPLUS password Press and enter password Then press to enter new password HEXT Call log Fsuds MEST Proarmina rswds SHOW SusCoord Appears only if using SAPLUS password Press CHANGE to enter new password MEST Sys coord Press CHANGE to enter new password MEST Basic Press CHANGE to enter new password HEAD IHG Progrming rswds HEST Pr
91. HAHGE to choose Y Yes or N No 10 Press Next The display shows Remind delay 11 Press CHAHGE to choose 30 60 90 120 150 or 180 seconds 12 Press 48 to exit or to continue in programming Conference tone This tone may be heard by all parties as soon as a three way call is established using the Conference or Privacy feature You can turn conference tones on or off for the whole system See Making a conference call on page 253 for information about using the Conference feature 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Exths 4 Press Next until the display shows Sastem er grming 5 Press Show _ The display shows Hunt araurs 6 Press Next until the display shows Featr settings 7 Press Show The display shows Back3rnd music 8 Press Next until the display shows Confrence tonei 9 Press CHAHGE to choose Y Yes or N No 10 Press 48 to exit or to continue in programming Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Programming feature settings 139 Directed call pickup Page tone The Directed pickup feature allows someone to pick up calls that are ringing at another telephone by entering 6 and the extension number You can enable or disable Directed pick
92. If you wish to call your voice message centre using a line other than the programmed line exit your message list and dial the voice message centre telephone number using normal dialling methods Viewing the messages you have sent On a telephone with a two line display you can view the messages you sent You can send up to four messages to different extensions Each extension including the Prime extension can receive up to four messages from different extensions but only one message from any one extension 1 Press r 2 Press SH W to display your first sent message 3 Press HEXT to move through your sent messages Displays Cancel denied You have entered an invalid number when attempting to cancel a message In use 21 You are trying to call from your message waiting list The line that you are trying to use is being used by the identified Norstar user Message denied You have tried to send a message to an invalid extension number or to a telephone that is out of service Message list SHOW appears only if you have outstanding SHOW ADL EXIT messages Press SHOl to review messages you have sent Press ALL to send a new message Message Lo Enter the extension number of the telephone to which you want to send a message Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Making internal calls 263 Messages amp Calls You have one or more messages and one or MSG CALLS more new Call Logs Press OJEJ to
93. Issue 01 Answering calls 233 Using Handsfree Your system telephone allows you to make calls without using the handset The M7000 T7000 and M7100N T7100 telephones do not support handsfree operation T7208 and T7316 telephones have a separate Mute key The system assigns Handsfree to the bottom right memory key but the Mute feature is assigned to the Mute key T7316E telephones have both a Mute and a Handsfree key which are located under the dial pad T7316 and T7316E telephones also have a Headset key which allows the user to switch between using the headset and using the other features such as Handsfree without need to remove the headset Making calls without lifting the handset 1 Ifyou do not have a Prime line assigned to your telephone press a line key 2 Press the button labelled Handsfree The internal microphone and speaker on your telephone are automatically turned on 3 Dial your call and speak at a normal level Answering calls without lifting the handset 1 Press the line key for the ringing call This step is not necessary if you have a Prime line assigned to your telephone 2 When your telephone rings press the button labelled Handsfree and speak normally Direct your voice toward the telephone The closer you are to the telephone the easier it is for the microphone to transmit your voice clearly to your listener Muting a handsfree call You can switch off the telephone microphone
94. Issue 01 Adding cordless capability 187 After you have registered the cordless handsets you can programme the extension name not all models of cordless handsets can display extension names programme where calls will be forwarded to when the cordless handset is busy or there is no answer assign extension or line extension filters for each Service assign a cordless handset to a Direct Dial extension Note Do not designate a cordless handset to be a Direct Dial extension because a cordless handset can handle only two calls at a time and may not always be reachable Also a cordless handset cannot invoke a Service mode to extend ringing to an Extra Dial telephone Each cordless handset is an extension and requires an extension number A user may have both a desk telephone and a cordless handset Both telephones have their own extension numbers You can switch your call between the cordless handset and the desk telephone To switch between cordless handset and desk telephone Use the Transfer feature described in the Using your Cordless Handset system feature card for your model of portable handset Note A person who has both a desk telephone and a cordless handset will be able to use the desk telephone to answer calls ringing at the handset if the Installer has programmed an Answer key on the desk telephone Refer to Answer keys on page 236 Registration password To register each cordless handset with the
95. Modular Plus system you must enter the Registration password on each cordless handset The default is 7 2 8 4 6 or RJ A D LJ 0 To change the Registration password see Setting the Registration password on page 175 Set your own password to prevent unauthorised cordless handsets from registering on your system You can choose any combination of one to six digits You will find it easier to remember the password if the numbers correspond to a word The current Registration password should always be recorded in the Programming Record but if you forget the password you can easily programme a new one Registering cordless handsets To communicate with the Modular Plus system each cordless handset must be registered to an extension number Refer to the Programming Record to see what extension numbers are available P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 188 Adding cordless capability By default the cordless handset extension numbers are 477 to 508 but the Installer may have changed the available number range Note You can register a cordless handset to more than one system You cannot register a cordless handset to more than one extension number per system You cannot register more than one cordless handset to one extension number Turning on Master Registration To register cordless handsets you must first turn on registration for the entire system The options are Yes or No
96. N I System Administration 9 Introduction 11 Safety and Regulatory information 12 You must be the administrator 13 Here s what you need to start programming 13 Understanding the telephone keys 15 Starting a programming session 19 Ending a programming session 19 Using passwords to access programming 19 Understanding your system 20 Map of Administrator Plus programming 20 System programming introduction 23 Conventions used in this guide 24 Programming overview 24 Using passwords 30 Programmable settings and features 32 Making suggestions 39 Advice Line 39 Programming Terminals and Extensions 41 Terminals amp Extensions 42 Assigning a line to an extension line access 42 Assigning line pool access 44 Assigning a Prime line to an extension 44 Assigning intercom keys to an extension 45 Assigning an Answer key to an extension 46 Setting the Originating Line Identification for an extension 47 Programming Hospitality Services 49 Hospitality extensions 50 Alarm time AL feature 51 Hospitality Services admin alarm feature 53 Room occupancy RO 54 Room condition RC 55 Service time 57 Software Keys 59 Viewing the system ID 60 Software Keys 60 Setting System speed dial 63 Setting System speed dial 64 Assigning a number to a System speed dial code 64 Selecting a line 65 Setting the speed dial to display a name 65 Setting the speed dial number to bypass restrictions 67 Naming extensions and li
97. NFIG The display shows Password I Press 7 2 7 6 6 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terninals amp Extris Press Next until the display shows System Frarming Press Show _ The display shows Hunt Grours Press Show _ The display shows Hunt Srours Press Show _ The display shows Shaw aroari Enter the hunt group number you want to programme 01 30 Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Programming Hunt groups 129 9 Press The display shows Member extns 10 Press until the display shows Hames 11 Press CHAHGE 12 Using the dialpad enter the name of the hunt group 13 Press to store the name 14 Press to exit or Next _ to continue programming Checking hunt group metrics This feature provides you with hunt group call information l ay Sy Ok oe 10 11 12 13 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press 2 6 6 6 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fassuord I Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Exktis Press Next until the display shows Usage Metrics Press Show The display shows Hunt Srours Press Show _ The display shows Show 9rour Enter the number of the hunt group you wish to view The display shows HG n gt metrics Press Show The display shows the date the information was last cleared P
98. NORs BTO Working together Norstar Modular Plus Release 5 System Administration Guide Published by Nortel Networks on behalf of British Telecommunications PLC All possible care has been taken in the preparation of this publication but British Telecommunications PLC assumes no liability for any inaccuracies that may occur British Telecommunication PLC reserves the right to make changes without notice both to this publication and to the product that it describes No part of this publication may be reproduced transmitted transcribed stored in a retrieval system or translated into any human or computer language in any form or by any means without prior written permission of British Telecommunications PLC If you find any errors in this publication or would like to make suggestions for its improvement please write to British Telecommunications Norstar Product Manager Weston House 246 High Holborn London WC1V 7DQ British Telecom is a registered trademark of British Telecommunications PLC Registered Office 81 Newgate Street London EC1A 7AJ Registered in England Number 1800000 Meridian Companion and Norstar are trademarks of Nortel Networks Meridian Norstar Business Communication System is manufactured by Nortel Networks Touchtone is a trademark of British Telecom This document is for use with Modular Plus Release 5 Norstar UK P0607110 Issue 01 Printed in Canada 2003 Nortel Networks Contents SECTIO
99. ONFIG The display shows Fassuord I 3 Press 7 2 7 5 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Extns Press Next until the display shows System erarmind Press Show The display shows Hunt Srours Press Show The display shows Show aroari Press Show _ The display shows Member extns Press until the display shows Hunt dela 10 Press CHANGE to select the setting 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Press 48 to exit or to continue programming 4 5 6 7 Enter the hunt group number you want to programme 01 30 8 9 Programming options if all hunt group members are busy A Hunt Group is busy when all extensions are ringing for a Hunt group call or all members are on a Hunt group call An extension that invokes Do Not Disturb DND on busy or is on an internal or external call does not make the Hunt group busy There are three routing options if all agents are busy BusyTone the caller gets a busy tone Overflow the call routes to the hunt group overflow position Queue the call stays in the system for the period of time programmed in timeout Within this period of time the call presents to an agent if one becomes available When time out occurs the call routes to the hunt group overflow position Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Programming Hunt groups 127 Oe RS 2 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on you
100. Pre Dial or Automatic dial feature before you pick up the handset or press the key labelled Intercom on a hotline telephone Refer to the Telephone Feature Card P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 110 Programming capabilities Auxiliary ringer An auxiliary ringer is a separate external telephone ringer or bell that must be connected by the installer The installer programs the auxiliary ringer to ring for calls on a particular line in programming An auxiliary ringer can also be programmed to ring for a line placed in a Service mode The extension default for auxiliary ringer is No See Chart 12 Extension capabilities 4 on page 335 in Appendix A for a programming overview 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 8 4 CONFIG The display shows Fassumordi 3 Press 2 8 J 6 J 4 6 ADMIN The display shows Terminals Extns 4 Press Show _ The display shows Show extnt i Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to programme The display shows nnn innr 6 Press twice The display shows Fwd no answer 7 Press until the display shows Aux ringer 8 9 Un Press CHAHGE to choose Y Yes or N No Press to exit or to continue in programming To use the auxiliary ringer with Night service you must programme under Services Allowing an extension to use Redirect ring As the
101. Press Next until the display shows Trnsfr cal 1bkt 11 Press CHANGE to choose 3 4 5 6 or 12 rings 12 Press 48 to exit or to continue in programming Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Programming feature settings 137 Network callback If you transfer a call to a private network destination and the call is not answered it comes back to you after a specified time Network callback defines the time in seconds before a call is returned to your extension Since the time reguired to transfer a call across the private network varies depending on the complexity of your private network you may need to experiment to achieve the correct setting Note Depending on how a private network call is routed it may not always be possible for the system to return a transferred call 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Password 3 Press 7 2 7 6 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Exths 4 Press Next until the display shows Sastem Fr9rming 5 Press Show _ The display shows Hunt araurs 6 Press Next until the display shows Featr settings 7 Press Show The display shows Back3rnd music 8 Press Next until the display shows Hetuk cal 1lbk 9 Press CHAHGE to choose 15 30 45 60 or 90 seconds 10 Press 48 to exit or to conti
102. Press Show The display shows D DialiiIntrnl 8 Press Show The display shows Intrril 9 Press CHANGE 10 Enter the extension number 11 Press 68 to exit or to continue in programming Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Assigning a Direct Dial extension 79 Programming an external Direct Dial extension When you assign an external number as the Direct Dial extension you must also specify whether to use a Prime line exchange line line pool or routing table to place the call 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 6 4 E CONFIG The display shows Fassworgdi 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Extrs 4 Press Next _ until the display shows Sastem Fr3rming 5 Press Show The display shows Hunt grours 6 Press Next J until the display shows Direct dial 7 Press Show The display shows D DialiiIntrnl 8 Press CHANGE to switch to Extrnl 9 Press Show The display shows Extrn1 Note If the direct dial telephone is on another system in a private network it is still considered an external number by the system Use the private network dialing string for that extension in this field 10 Press CHAHGE then enter up to 24 digits for the external number 11 Press OF The display shows the number you have entered 12 Pr
103. Press TIME and record the time displayed 3 Call the Advice Line and report the alarm code 4 After speaking to the support person press CLEAR Clearing lines A line is hung when it remains busy even when no conversation or data communication is taking place and it cannot be disconnected by normal means Lines can become hung when exchange lines are connected to AC15A private circuits Lines connected to a device such as an answering machine fax machine or modem can also become hung It is a matter of judgement to decide whether a line is hung or simply in use When a line is busy you see a solid indicator next to the line key and the message Line in use when you attempt to select the line If a line is the only line in a line pool and it is busy a solid indicator appears next to the line pool key and the message Ho free lines appears on the display For a line that is one of several lines in a line pool there is no direct indication that the line is busy as long as other lines in the line pool are free The indicator next to the line pool key and the Ho free lines message appear only when all lines in a line pool are busy If one or more lines in a line pool become hung these busy indications appear with greater frequency than usual Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Troubleshooting 199 Note If you ensure that all lines assigned to line pools appear individually on at least one telephon
104. Press until the display shows DisFlay cntrst 10 Press CHAHGE to choose 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 or 9 11 Press 68 to exit or to continue in programming Note You do not see any change in the display of the telephone you are using when you are programming User preferences from another telephone Changing the Ring type See Ring type on page 221 for information on using this feature l 9 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press 2 6 6 6 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi Press 2 8 6 4 6 ADMIN The display shows Terminals Extn Press Show _ The display shows Show extrit Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to programme The display shows nnn innr Press Show The display shows Carabilities Press Next _ until the display shows User Frefernces Press Show _ The display shows Model followed by a five digit code Press Next until the display shows Ring tre 10 Press CHAHGE to choose 1 2 3 or 4 11 Press 48 to exit or to continue in programming Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Programming Hunt groups e Hunt Groups 120 e Adding or removing members from a group 121 e Moving members of a group 122 e Assigning or unassigning lines to a group 123 e Assigning a distinctive ring pattern to a Hunt Group
105. Q 7 to have call information recorded on the central office system of the line source provider for an incoming call on a specific line EUROISDN lines only Note This feature must be allowed in network programming to work Check with your system administrator Invoke the feature code without hanging up and within 30 seconds time varies on different networks after the caller hangs up The following information registers on the network called party number calling party number local time and date of the invocation in the network serving the called user service provider option calling party subaddress if provided by calling user P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 238 Answering calls Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Holding calls 239 Holding calls e Holding 240 e Listening on hold 241 P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 240 Holding calls Holding When you puta call on hold the Modular Plus system maintains the connection to the caller but the call is no longer active at your telephone The indicator flashes on all telephones that have access to the line where the call is on hold The call can be retrieved from any of these telephones To put a call on hold press J To retrieve a held call press the flashing line key of the held call If the call comes in on a DIA line the in
106. The display shows Show extnt i Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to programme The display shows nnn innr Press twice The display shows Fwd no answers Press until the display shows Handsfree Press CHAHGE to choose Auto Std or None Press to exit or to continue in programming On asas ATTENTION The T7316E keystation must be set to Auto to allow the handsfree button work When a call is answered the keystation defaults to the last used answer method Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Programming capabilities 105 Programming Handsfree answerback Handsfree answerback allows you to answer a call without lifting the receiver It is always turned off for M1700N T7000 and M7000 T7000 telephones 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi 3 Press 2 8 J 6 4 6 ADMIN The display shows Terminals Extns 4 Press Show The display shows Show extnt i Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to programme The display shows nnn innr Press twice The display shows Fwd no answers Press until the display shows HF answerback Press CHAHGE to choose Y Yes or N No Press 48 to exit or to continue in programming Un nn ATTENTION The T7316E keystation defaults to the
107. These numbers are entered in the Modular Plus system through programming using the Prime telephone and the Software Keys heading Once the Software Keys are entered the system makes the corresponding capability available Record the passwords in the Modular Plus Programming Record You need the numbers to restore an upgraded system after a cold start Entering the Software Keys 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fassword I 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Extns 4 Press Next _ until the display shows Software Keys 5 Press Show The display shows Sys ID 6 Press Next The display shows Fassword keys 7 Press Show The display shows Kes 1 Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Software Keys 61 8 Enter the eight digit password number for Key1 Use BESF to make corrections As soon as the eighth digit is entered the display shows Key 21 9 Enter the eight digit password number for Key 2 The display shows Kes 33 10 Enter the eight digit password number for Key 3 11 Press 0K The display shows Entry successful 12 Press lt 8 to exit or to continue in programming P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 62 Software Keys Modular Plus System Administration Guide P060711
108. Trunk type BRI 2 2 port BRI card BRI 4 4 port BRI card Line type PoolA PoolB to O Public Private to PrimeExtn 221 CLID extn None Auto privacy Y Ans mode Auto Manual if Ans mode Auto Ans with DISA N Aux ringer N Full AutoHold N Dstnct ring None 2 3 4 DASS2 lines 001 to 030 031 to 060 Trunk type DASS2 Line type PoolA PoolB to O Public Private to PrimeExtn 221 CLID extn None Auto privacy Y Ans mode Auto Manual if Ans mode Auto Ans with DISA N Aux ringer N Full AutoHold N Dstnct ring None 2 3 4 PRI lines 001 to 030 031 to 060 Trunk type PRI Line type PoolA PoolB to O Public Private to PrimeExtn 221 CLID extn None Auto privacy Y Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 System programming introduction 27 I Ans mode Auto Manual if Ans mode Auto Ans with DISA N Aux ringer N Full AutoHold N Dstnct ring None 2 3 4 Exchange line 001 to 004 031 to 034 061 to 230 Trunk type Loop Line type PoolA PoolB to O Public Private to Dial mode Tone Pulse PrimeExtn 221 Auto privacy Y Mode EarthCallng LoopGuarded LoopUnguard if Mode Earth Calling or LoopGuarded Ans mode Auto Manual if Ans mode Auto Ans with DISA N Aux ringer N if Mode LoopUnguard Recall Timed brk Earth500 Earth1000 Earth1500 Recall at EXCH N Dial Tone Detect Delay Full AutoHold N Dstnct ring None 2 3 4 AC15A private c
109. a Type Show radio 011 Internal External Cells 01 08 Show cell _ Cell 01 Cell radios Show radio 1011 Assigned Unassigned Cell nghbrs Show nghbr _ 01 Assigned Unassigned Cell rad nghbrs Show RadNghbr _ 01 Assigned Unassigned System LID Rec d lengths Private length 3 1 7 Public length 3 1 7 Extn length 3 4 5 6 7 Loc code Hospitality Room desk info Show extn __ Room _ Adm pwd req d Y Call prmissions Vacant 00 Use fit Basic 00 Mid 00 Full 00 Service time Hour 00 Minutes 00 Alarm Attn attempts 1 2 3 4 5 Retry intrvl 2 4 6 8 Attn duration 10 15 20 30 40 50 Time format 12hr 24hr Expired Alarms Notify extn None Use tone N Network Services ETSI Network Diversion N MCID N Call Services MMsg cir data VMsg center 1 2 3 4 5 Tel _ MWI MWC Software Keys SysID 8 digits Password keys Key 1 8 digits Key 2 8 digits Key 3 8 digits Hardware Show Module Cards on CCU Cd1 CCU Loop BRI 4 BRI 2 PRI DASS2 DPNSS requires keycode Cd2 CCU Loop BRI 4 BRI 2 PRI DASS2 DPNSS requires keycode if BRI card Card type BRI 2 BRI 4 Loops 201 204 4 port BRI Cd1 231 234 4 port BRI Cd2 201 202 2 port BRI Cd1 231 232 2 port BRI Cd2 Type S T Loop nnn If Type T press to view Lines on loop If Type T Protocol Euro BTNR 191 If Type T D Packet service keycode required If Type S Sampling Adaptve Fixed
110. access the Direct Dial extension enter the Direct Dial digit the default Direct Dial number is 0 The Direct Dial extension can send up to 30 messages and can invoke Services to activate the extra dial telephone You can change which Direct Dial telephone an extension is assigned to including none at all Any number of telephones can be assigned to call the Direct Dial telephone See Chart 11 Extension capabilities 3 on page 334 in Appendix A for a programming overview See Accessing a Direct Dial extension on page 260 for information on using this feature P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 108 Programming capabilities 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 6 4 E CONFIG The display shows Fassumordi 3 Press 2 8 J 6 J 4 6 ADMIN The display shows Terminals Extn 4 Press Show The display shows Show extnt s 5 Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to programme The displays shows hnninnr 6 Press twice The display shows Fwd no answer 7 Press until the display shows L Lial 8 Press CHANGE to select Extn1 Extn2 Extn3 Extn4 Extn5 or None 9 Press to exit or to continue in programming Allowing Priority call If you get a busy signal or a Do Not Disturb message when you have an urgent call for someone in your office you can interrupt thei
111. ake external calls by using the intercom key and dialling the exchange code the default exchange code is 9 The exchange code is generally used to make external calls on M7100N T7100 or M7000 T7000 telephones and on telephones connected to an Analogue Terminal Adapter Using line pools A line pool is a group of exchange lines that can be shared by many telephones You can use a line in a line pool to make an external call The Modular Plus can have a maximum of 15 line pools and a telephone can be programmed to access any of them A line pool access code is a number you dial to get a line pool The access code can be up to four digits long You can have several different line pools for your system each one giving you access to a different set of exchange lines It is one way of sharing lines across telephones in a system You programme the line pool access codes and give each telephone access to a line pool Everyone in the office should have a list of the line pool access codes for the line pools their telephones can use Using a line pool to make a call 1 Press Cej 6 4 2 Enter a line pool access code If you have a free internal line you can make a call using a line pool without entering the feature code first 1 Select an internal line intercom 2 Dial the line pool access code If no lines are available in the line pool you can use Ring Again at the busy tone You are notified when a line in the line
112. all Log displays the same information as Call Information along with the date and time of the call and the number of times the caller called Note You may continue to press line keys to get information on other calls If you press the same line key twice you are connected to that call If you press any other key including keys used to show more information about a call you exit the Call Information feature and the key you pressed performs its normal function P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 288 Using display features Call Information symbols Only incoming calls can be logged Calls preceded by are outgoing and cannot be logged Symbol Description Indicates the number of the telephone you called not an incoming call Press or LIEU to see the rest of the number You cannot use another feature until you exit the Call Information feature x The number is incomplete missing digits The number shown is too long The last 14 digits are shown following the 4 The call shown in the call log has been answered Call log If your system is equipped with the appropriate equipment and you have subscribed to the call information feature supplied by your service provider you can capture information about incoming callers in your call log The same feature is supplied by an ISDN service package that comes with calling line identification CLID Y
113. araurs 6 Press Next until the display shows Featr settings 7 Press Show The display shows Back3rnd music 8 Press Next until the display shows Fark Mode 9 Press CHAHGE to choose Lowest or Cycle 10 Press 48 to exit or to continue in programming P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 136 Programming feature settings Transfer callback If Transfer callback is enabled after a specified number of rings a transferred call that remains unanswered returns to the telephone that made the transfer Transfer callback allows you to enable disable this feature and to specify the number of rings before the call is returned when the feature is enabled You can estimate the delay in seconds if you multiply the number of rings by six See Transferring a call on page 247 for information about the Transfer feature 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Exths 4 Press Next until the display shows System er grming 5 Press Show _ The display shows Hunt araurs 6 Press Next until the display shows Featr settings 7 Press Show The display shows Back3rnd music 8 Press Next until the display shows Trnsfr cal lbk 9 Press CHAHGE to choose Y Yes or N No 10
114. at is a member of a hunt group can be picked up by any extension in that call pickup group See Assigning a Pickup group on page 105 Prime extension The Modular Plus system automatically assigns extension 221 as the Prime extension for each exchange line Your system installer can change the extension number in Lines programming The Prime extension can be programmed to receive unanswered calls through Delayed Ring Transfer Held Line Reminders and Do not Disturb transfers In a busy office the receptionist or secretary extension may be designated as the Prime extension Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 System programming introduction 35 Prime line for an extension A line can be assigned to a telephone as its primary line to use when making an outgoing call This feature saves the user time because the system automatically selects the line rather than the user having to select the line See Assigning a Prime line to an extension on page 44 Re direct ring When this feature is turned on the extension gives an audible signal whenever a call has been re directed This reminds you that a line has been re directed using the Line redirection feature and serves as a cue to turn the feature off For example you have re directed line to another extension in the network If Redirect ring is on you hear a short ring every time a call on line 1 is forwarded to the other telepho
115. at once Basestations are positioned and grouped into cells that provide continuous telephone service in the specified coverage area of your business premises both indoors and outdoors The CCU hands off your call from one cell to another as you walk around within the coverage area Cordless handsets The cordless handsets used with your Modular Plus system are small lightweight units with fully digital performance to provide clear voice quality For more information refer to the Cordless Handset User Guide for your model of cordless handset Cordless handsets can be assigned to someone as the only telephone or in addition to the desk telephone with a separate extension number Programming Programming of cordless capability is easily and quickly done on a T7316 T7316E M7310N or M7324N telephone The administration terminal is used to assign cordless handsets to the system check Basestation parameters programme cells and radios and enable and disable registration As you programme the cordless handsets make sure that you record the information in the Programming Record You can do the following turn on Master Registration for the entire system check if an extension number is available for registration register each cordless handset using the Registration password de register a cordless handset turn off Master Registration for the entire system Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110
116. ature code Even if you are calling from another Modular Plus system press instead of Le J Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Remote access 183 Line Pool access 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Extns 4 Press Next _ until the display shows System ergrming 5 Press Show The display shows Hunt grours 6 Press Next until the display shows Remote access 7 Press Show The display shows Remote access pkgs 8 Press Show again The display shows Show Fkg 9 Enter the number of the package 00 to 15 10 Press Show _ The display shows LineFool accessi 11 Press Show _ again The display shows Fool Ai 12 Press CHAHGE to choose N No or Y Yes 13 Press 48 to exit or to move to the next line pool Remote page 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Extns 4 Press Next _ until the display shows System ergrming 5 Press Show The display shows Hunt grours 6 Press Next until the display shows Remote access 7 Press Show The display sh
117. ay Norstar BST extension If configured the display reads Passwordi 2 Enter the Desk admin password The display reads Cd of rm t 3 Enter the room number and press OK The display reads rrrrriVacant 4 Press the CHAMGE display key and select the required status for the room extension e if the room is occupied select Srvc done or Heeds sruc if the room is vacant select Vacant or Heeds ruc The default setting is Vacant 5 To update or query other room extensions press the FIHD or HET display key and return to step 3 If there are no more room extensions updates or queries press the key to exit programming Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Programming Hospitality Services 57 Service time The Service time heading under Hosritality in System Frarming allows you to programme the time when occupied rooms change state from Service done to Service required The Service time heading is an integral part of the Room condition RC feature 1 ON 11 12 13 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press C 0 NJ EJI G The display reads Fasswordi Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals amp Extrs Press Next _ until the display reads System Frarmina Press Show _ The display shows Hunt araurs Press Next until the display shows HosFitality Press Show _ The
118. ay shows AM Press CHANGE to select PM 8 Press OK 9 Press Next The display shows Minutes 10 Press CHANGE 11 Enter the minutes 00 to 59 12 Press to exit or to continue in programming Sy OR Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Changing the time and date 75 Changing the date 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 6 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi 3 Press 2 8 J 6 J 4 6 ADMIN The display shows Terminals Exths 4 Press Next _ until the display shows Time late 5 Press Show The display shows Hart 6 Press Next twice The display shows ear 7 Press CHANGE 8 Enter the last two digits of the current year 9 Press Next The display shows Months 10 Press CHANGE 11 Enter the month 01 to 12 12 Press Next The display shows Day 13 Press CHANGE 14 Enter the day of the month 01 to 31 15 Press 48 to exit or to continue in programming Changing the time and date using the Basic password You can change the time and date using 6 TIME and the Basic password 1 Press 6 B TIME The display shows Passwords 2 Press 2 2 7 4 2 BASIC The display shows Hors 3 Press CHAHGE or HEXT if you do not need to change the hour Enter the hour 00 to 23 If the number is less than 13 the display
119. ay shows the members for that group Press MOWE to move an existing member to another place within the hunt group The display shows the member number followed by an arrow Enter the new position number for the extension Press to exit or to continue programming Members line appearance Member extensions can have a line appearance of Appear only Appear and Ring or Ring Only l Aa p p e Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press 2 6 6 6 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fassword I Press 7 2 7 6 6 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terninals amp extris Press Next until the display shows System Fr9rming Press Show The display shows Hunt Srours Press Show The display shows Show 3raur Enter the hunt group number you want to programme 01 30 Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Programming Hunt groups 123 8 Press Show _ The display shows Member extns 9 Press The display shows the members for that group 10 Press CHAHGE to select Appr only Appr amp Ring or Ring only The default is Appr amp Ring 11 Press 48 to exit or to continue programming Assigning or unassigning lines to a group We recommend that you set the Hunt group line Prime extension to None Doing so prevents delayed ring transfer of external hunt group calls to the Prime extension before the hunt group can receiv
120. ber De registering makes the extension number available for registration De register an extension number when Note the cordless handset must be replaced due to loss or breakage the cordless handset owner departs and you want to assign the cordless handset to someone else and use a different extension number for that person the cordless handset has been stolen and you wish to prevent unauthorised access to your system You can also de register a cordless handset from the system using on air de registration by the cordless handset For more information see the Cordless Handset Registration Instructions for your model of cordless handset Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fassword I Press Termi 4 Press 5 Press 6 Press T 8 9 Press Press Press 10 Press 7 2 7 6 7 SAPLUS The display shows nals Extns Next until the display shows System Frarming Show _ The display shows Hunt 3rours Next until the display shows Companion Show The display shows Registration Show _ The display shows Fegistration Next The display shows Fortable extns Show _ The display shows Show DH Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Adding cordless capability 191 11 Enter the extension number The display shows the extension f
121. can apply a different line or extension restriction for normal service and for each of the six schedules A maximum of 255 line extension restrictions may be applied to lines at telephones If a line extension restriction is assigned to a line at a particular telephone it overrides any line restrictions or extension restrictions that might otherwise apply If no line extension restrictions have been defined the numbers are checked against the extension restrictions and the line restrictions if either of these have been defined The numbers may be rejected by either restriction 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fassuord 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals amp extrs 4 Press Show _ The display shows Show extri 5 Enter the extension number of the telephone you want to programme The display shows nnn innr 6 Press Show The display shows Line access 7 Press Nex until the display shows Restrictions 8 Press Show The display shows Restrn filters 9 Press Next J until the display shows Line extn rstrn 10 Press Show _ The display shows Show lines 11 Enter the line number 12 Press Show _ The display shows Hormal P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 88 Barring calls and privileges Restricti
122. code on the DPNSS line Note When setting DPNSS Diversion using certain digits and Feature codes cannot be used in the dialout number This is because the digits received from the network must map to a valid extension in the PBX and these will not They are listed in following table Invalid digits codes 2 6 0 4 Redirection Redirection is a DPNSS 1 feature for Norstar similar to the Norstar Transfer Callback feature Redirection allows a call that has not connected or is on hold to be redirected by the originating party to an alternate destination after a time out period Failed calls can also be redirected Priority calls cannot be redirected Note The address to redirect depends on the history of the call Calls that have been transferred could be redirected to the party that transferred it In all other cases the address to redirect is the one registered at the PBX originating the redirection The Diversion on No Reply feature takes precedence over Redirection Setting Redirection The timer used for the network Callback Feature applies for redirection See Transfer callback on page 136 P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 308 Digital Private Network Signalling System Number 1 DPNSS 1 Executive Intrusion Executive Intrusion ED is a DPNSS 1 feature that allows an operator or other calling party to intrude on a line when it is busy Thi
123. cord any programming changes in Programming Record Chart 14 Extension relocation on page 337 Relocate to extension jacks that are configured for telephones When moving extensions from one jack to another ensure that all jacks support a Norstar telephone or Business Series Terminal If a fax machine Analogue Terminal Adapter analogue telephone or modem was plugged into the jack do not plug a Norstar telephone or Business Series Terminal into the jack until you are sure it is wired correctly for the telephone 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi 3 Press 7 2 7 5 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Extns 4 Press Next until the display shows System er grming 5 Press Show _ The display shows Hunt araurs 6 Press Next until the display shows Featr settings 7 Press Show The display shows Back3rnd music 8 Press Next until the display shows Extn relocatni 9 Press CHAHGE to choose Y Yes or N No 10 Press 48 to exit or Next to continue in programming Copying programming for telephones During programming you can copy certain programmed settings from one line to another or from one telephone to another using the COPY key when it appears on the display You can copy either system programming or system programming and
124. cuits and exchange lines You do this by assigning a remote access filter to the AC15A private circuits or exchange lines See Chart 7 Remote access packages on page 330 in Appendix A for a programming overview 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fassuiord I 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Extns 4 Press Next _ until the display shows System Prarmina 5 Press Show The display shows Hunt Srours 6 Press Next until the display shows Remote access 7 Press Show twice The display shows Show Fkaz 8 Enter a package number 9 Press Show The display shows LinePaol access 10 Press Show _ The display shows Fool Ai 11 Press CHAHGE to choose Y Yes or N No 12 Press Heading _ 13 Press Next The display shows Remote radge 14 Press CHAHGE to choose Y Yes or N No 15 Press Heading twice 16 Press Show The display shows Rem access pkgs 17 Press Next The display shows Rem line access 18 Press Show The display shows Show line 19 Enter the number of the AC15A private circuit 241 to 254 The displays shows the line number followed by Rem Fkg 20 Press CHAHGE 21 Enter the number of the remote package that you just created 22 Press to exit or to continue in programming P0607110 Issue 01 M
125. d Restrictions Extn only Restrn service Time amp Date Call services Routing service System prgrming Sys speed dial Companion Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 System programming introduction 31 Entering programming using the SAPLUS password The staff member who is in charge of making changes to the Modular Plus system is called the system administrator The System Administrator Plus password allows the administrator to access all the settings for administration programming plus a few installer settings that may need to be changed infreguently All procedures in this guide indicate whether you need to use the System Administrator Plus or the Administrator password The default System Administrator Plus password is 7 2 7 6 7 which spells SAPLUS on the keypad 1 Press 2 61 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Password I 2 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals amp Extns Three triangular indicators B appear on the vertical display between the rows of keys 3 Place the programming overlay over the keys pointed to by the indicators p Entering programming using the Administrator password The Administrator password is your key to administration programming Most of the programming in this guide can be entered with the Administrator password The default Administrator password is 2 8 6 4 6 which spells ADMIN on the te
126. d Your handsfree microphone is muted Press the button labelled Handsfree mute or Mute or pick up your handset to respond to the voice call Ho voice call The telephone receiving the call cannot accept voice calls for one of the following reasons it is active or ringing with another call e Call Forward is turned on e Do Not Disturb is turned on e Voice Call Deny is turned on e itis not a Norstar telephone Your call proceeds automatically as a regular ringing call Woice call The line is open for you to speak Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Making internal calls 267 P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide Forwarding calls e Forwarding your calls 269 e External Call Forward 270 e Forwarding all calls 271 e Line redirection 272 P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide Forwarding calls 269 Forwarding your calls You can forward your calls to an internal or external telephone Press and enter the number of the telephone to which you want your calls forwarded To forward your calls to an external destination you must enter the route plus the dialling digits of the external telephone For example if your system requires you to dial 9 for external calls then you must enter 9 plus the dialling digits to forward your calls to an external number To enable External Call Forwarding ECF the indiv
127. d traffic The number of appearances for a DIA line is not limited to the number of appearances on that extension As many DIA calls are redirected as the outgoing resource permits You can answer the telephone if it rings while you are in the middle of programming Line redirection but none of the Modular Plus call handling features are available until the feature times out If you need to use a Modular Plus feature to process the call guit Line redirection programming by pressing Do not press or you will disconnect the call you are trying to process While you are programming Line redirection you do not receive any indication of calls that do not actually ring at your telephone Be careful to avoid redirection loops If for example you redirect your lines to your branch office and your branch office redirects its lines to you you can create a redirection loop In certain situations callers may experience lower volume levels when you redirect calls to an external location Redirecting your lines 1 Press a 2 Select the outgoing line to be used for redirected calls 3 Do one of the following to indicate where the line will be redirected maximum 24 digits Enter the number from the dial pad including routing codes e press an auto dial key that has the number programmed if the number is on a Saved Number Redial or Last Number Redial key press that memory key 4 Press or OK Note If the outgoing line is
128. ded or Earth Calling lines When an incoming call comes in on an auto answer loop guarded or Earth calling line that is not configured to answer with DISA the caller hears system dial tone They can then enter a DIA line public received number to dial direct to an extension a line pool access code to break out or a remote feature code from a DTMF telephone if a suitable remote access package has been assigned Number of appearances The installer programs the number of appearances for each DIA line assigned to the extension When an extension with an appearance of a DIA line answers a call other extensions with appearances of that DIA line do not track the state of that call The other extensions are free to receive additional calls on the DIA line while the first call is still in progress By default the number of DIA line appearances is one The secondary appearance of a DIA line is any appearance given to an extension after the first appearance There is a limit to the number of secondary target line appearances in the system Automatically the first DIA line 255 is assigned to the first Start extension number of 5255 DIA line 256 is assigned to the next extension number 5256 and so on Also the Received numbers as well as the Originating Line Identification number are automatically set to the extension number P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 246 Routing calls Received number Whe
129. dial entry as defined under CLID match Refer to CLID Match on page 144 To program the order that the name appears on your telephone follow these steps 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 61 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Password 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Extris 4 Press Show _ The display shows Show extr 5 Enter the extension number of the telephone you want to programme The display shows rnn innr Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Setting System speed dial 67 6 Press Show _ The display shows Line access 7 Press Next until the display shows Call Services 8 Press Show _ The display shows Auta Call Services 9 Press Next The display shows istDisrlay 10 Press CHAHGE until you get to Name 11 Press OK 12 Press 48 to exit or to continue programming Setting the speed dial number to bypass restrictions System speed dial numbers are generally subject to any restrictions that are programmed in the Modular Plus system but they can be programmed to bypass these restrictions The default setting is N No which means the number is subject to normal call restrictions 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordg I
130. dial tone from that system before dialling the rest of your number The Wait for Dial Tone symbol 5 uses two of the 24 spaces in an autodial or speed dial seguence Press 0 4 while programming a dialling sequence Displays Invalid code You have entered a code that can only be used in a programmed autodial or speed dial sequence not on a call you dial directly Programmed Release and Run Stop are for use in programmed dialling sequences only Using pulse dialling for a call If your external telephone lines use pulse dialling you can temporarily switch to tone dialling by pressing 4 after selecting the line Tone dialling allows your telephone to communicate with devices and services that respond to tone signals such as automatic switchboards and fax or answering machines Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN e ISDN services 300 e Digital Network Adapter 302 P0607110 Issue O1 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 300 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN ISDN services Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN provides a fast accurate and reliable means of sending and receiving data image text and voice information through the telephone system Two types of ISDN service are supported on Norstar systems Basic Rate Interface BRI and Primary Rate Interface PRI The Modular Plus system supports the 2 p
131. dicator flashes at the telephone that answered the call leaving other telephones which have appearances of that DIA line free to take other incoming calls The call can be retrieved at the answering extension On the T7100 M7100N telephones alternates between two lines one active one on hold These telephones cannot retrieve a call placed on hold by another telephone On the T7000 M7000 telephones pressing sdh puts a call on hold This telephone cannot retrieve a call placed on hold by another Answered hunt group calls can be placed on hold at the answering extension Automatic Hold If you are on a call and want to pick up another call at your telephone use Automatic Hold Press the line key of the caller you want to speak to Your current caller is put on hold automatically Exclusive Hold You can put a call on Exclusive Hold so that the call can be retrieved only at your telephone Press BJ or The line appears busy on all other telephones with that line appearance and the call cannot be picked up by anyone else in the office Display On hold LIMEHAM You have placed one or more lines on hold The name of the line that has been held the longest is displayed This feature works with external calls only Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Holding calls 241 Listening on hold If you have been put on hold Listen on Hold allows you to replace the handset and wait to
132. display shows User rrefernces 8 Press Show The display shows Model followed by a five digit code 9 Press Next The display shows Key Frarming 10 Press Show The display shows how many keys are on that model of telephone 11 Press FIND or press to see a list of key programming 12 Press TEL FEATE or CLF to change the programming for any key 13 Press 48 to exit or to continue in programming Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Programming User preferences 115 Changing a Personal user speed dial code See Personal Speed Dial codes on page 225 for information about using this feature l 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press 2 6 6 6 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi Press 2 6 6 4 6 ADMIN The display shows Terminals Extns Press Show _ The display shows Show extnit Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to programme The display shows nnn innr Press Show The display shows Carabilities Press Next until the display shows User Frefernces Press Show _ The display shows Model followed by a five digit code Press Next _ twice The display shows User sreed dial Press Show The display shows the number of speed dial codes that are available Press Next to see the first speed dial
133. dministration Guide 114 Programming User preferences Programming User preferences The User preferences section of programming allows you to programme memory keys speed dial codes and other settings for any Norstar BST telephone on the system For example an employee may want to have the Do Not Disturb feature programmed to a memory key or create a speed dial code Instead of programming from that telephone you can enter User preferences on the nearest two line display telephone See Chart 13 User preferences on page 336 for a programming overview You can copy User preferences settings from one telephone to another whenever COF appears on the display The only programming that does not get copied is key programming between different models of telephones Changing the key programming for an extension If there is one or more key on a particular model of telephone that you would like to change you can customise one key at a time 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fassumordi 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Extns 4 Press Show The display shows Show extnt i 5 Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to programme The display shows nnn innr 6 Press Show The display shows Line access 7 Press Next until the
134. dopted by the European Parliament And Of The Council C The CE Marking on this equipment indicates compliance with This is a class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be reguired to take adeguate measures Hereby Nortel Networks declares that Modular ICS is in compliance with the essential reguirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999 5 EC Information is subject to change without notice Nortel Networks reserves the right to make changes in design or components as progress in engineering and manufacturing may warrant This eguipment has been tested and found to comply with the European Safety reguirements EN 60950 and EMC reguirements EN 55022 Class A and EN 55024 These EMC limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the eguipment is operated in a commercial and light industrial environment WARNING This is a class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be reguired to take adeguate measures The above warning is inserted for regulatory reasons If any customer believes that they have an interference problem either because their Nortel Networks product seems to cause interference or suffers from interference they should contact their distributor immediately The distributor will assist with a remedy for any problems a
135. dset key Allows user to use switch between headset and handset answer mode Lo without removing headset Only available on T7316 and T7316E keystations Telephone programming buttons This guide shows the Business Series Terminal BST buttons The following table shows how the Business Series Terminals T series buttons compare with the Norstar telephones M series auto Name FRET TRS urn ai o Hold es e s or Hold Ces _ T7000 sah M7000 Release 52 Jor Release Feature Fy or Feature To use a feature Press J Feature or Fx and enter the feature code For example Press R to access your mailbox Note The BST terminal programming keys have label tabs beside the buttons Entering numbers and letters using the keypad Use the keys on the telephone keypad to enter numbers and letters during programming When you enter programming or use a feature code the keys you press often spell a word For example when you press 2 6 6 6 4 4 the number keys spell CONFIG The C is on key number 2 the O is on key number 6 the N is also on key number 6 and so on However the display P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 18 Introduction shows numbers instead of letters The word just provides an easy way to remember the seguences of numbers Entering names using the keypad When you want to us
136. e Show f Next e Show f Next The display shows Line access until the display shows Restrictions The display shows Restrn filters until the display shows Extn restrns The display shows Filters until the display shows Allow redirecti 12 Press CHAHGE to choose Y Yes or N No 13 Press 48 to exit or to continue in programming P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 98 Barring calls and privileges Restrictions Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Programming capabilities e Programming an extension 100 e Setting Call Forward no answerv 100 Setting Call Forward on busy 102 Programming Do Not Disturb on busy 102 e Programming Handsfree 104 e Programming Handsfree answerback 105 e Assigning a Pickup group 105 e Assigning a page zone 106 Allowing paging 107 e Assigning telephones to the Direct Dial extension 107 Allowing Priority call 108 e Assigning a Hotline 109 e Auxiliary ringet 110 e Allowing an extension to use Redirect ring 110 e Receive tones 111 P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 100 Programming capabilities Programming an extension Many features that can be used at individual extensions see Appendix A Programming overviews on page 323 must f
137. e 195 VIOC See Visually Handicapped Operator Con sole Visually Impaired Operator Console 117 212 Voice Call answering 265 features 265 making 265 muting tones 265 preventing 265 W Wait for dialtone feature 298 wild cards destination code 165 Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01
138. e 279 for information on using intercom keys 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordg I 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals amp extrs 4 Press Show _ The display shows Show extn 5 Enter the extension number of the telephone you want to programme The display show nnninnr P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 46 Programming Terminals and Extensions 6 Press twice The display shows Line a i3rmerit 7 Press until the display shows Intercom kesi 8 Press CHAHGE to select the setting 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 or 8 9 Press to exit or to continue in programming Each intercom key assigned during programming automatically appears on the telephone The keys start with the lower right hand key or one key above if the Handsfree Mute feature is assigned to the bottom right key on the extension A telephone needs two intercom keys to establish a conference call with two other telephones Only one intercom key may be required if the key is only to be used to access line pools and to make and receive internal calls If a telephone has several lines assigned only to ring and not appear the arrangement works better if there are two intercom keys The M7100N and T7100 telephone default assignment of two intercom keys ca
139. e O1 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 14 Introduction an M7310N extension and its programming overlay K Heading Back JU Norstar Programming Overlay M7310N MT SE Mo Show SS Na Next JU Placing the programming overlay Place the programming overlay on the appropriate four memory keys as shown in the preceding illustrations The four markedmemory keys have special functions during a programming session Once you exit programming the keys return to their normal functions The programming keys are active or inactive at different stages of programming When a key is active the indicator next to it is lit with a lt q or P This is what each programming key does Heading shows you the heading for the current level Back moves you back one item at the current level Show shows you the first setting within the level Next moves you one item forward at the current level Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Introduction 15 The diagram below visually shows you how the overlay buttons move through the menus Terminals Extns EXT r Back Current display Heading EXT 222 Show Next Line Access EXT 223 Understanding the telephone keys Take a few minutes to study the telephones Notice that the M7324N T7316 and T7316E telephones do not have a shift key or dual memory keys Locate the different items
140. e a key to spell a name such as naming a hunt group during programming the function of the key changes according to the number of times you press the key The following illustration shows the functions for the keypad key when entering letters Keypad key press once for the letter D press twice for the letter E press three times for the letter F A press four times for the number 3 More about display keys Use the three display keys below the display on your telephone to set and select options Their function depends on the instruction that appears on the display directly above each key Some display instructions that you may see during programming are DOWH LIF or OE Display keys Contrast level 2 Display text Instructions for display keys DOW Display keys am m Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Introduction 19 Starting a programming session As administrator the first steps in making any change to the Modular Plus system are always the same You must press and then press 2 6 6 B 4 4 to access programming Jan 1 1 88am Press J Feature Press 2 6 6 B 4 k CONFIG Password Press 2 8 6 4 6 ADMIN RETRY Press RETR to re enter the password if it is entered incorrectly Terminals Extis The display shows the first of the seven headings available for programming 2 B 6 4 6 ADMIN is the Administrator pas
141. e appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press C OJN FJ L GJ The display reads Fasswordi 3 Press 7 2 Z 6JB TZ SAPLUS The display shows Terninals amp Extris Press Next until the display reads Passwords Press Show The display reads COS rsuds Press Next until the display reads Hosritality Press Show The display reads Desk Fsud 4677 Press the CHAHGE display key Enter a one to six digit number Press OK AD eS Room condition password The Room condition password controls the ability to change the room condition with 6 The default room condition password is None Different from the Desk admin password the room condition password can remain as None To change the default Room condition password 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press C O NJ FJ L GJ The display reads Fassword 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Extn 4 Press until the display reads Passwords Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Passwords 175 2 1 En Press Show Press Next Press Show Press Next The display reads COS F uds until the display reads HosFitality The display reads Desk Fawdi4677 The display reads Cond Feud iHone Press the CHAHGE display key Enter a one to six digit number Press OE Setting t
142. e at the message centre P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 314 Digital Private Network Signalling System Number 1 DPNSS 1 Loop avoidance Errors in the configuration of a network may make it possible for a call to be misrouted and arrive at a PBX through which it has already passed This would cause a loop which would eventually use up all of the available channels The Loop Avoidance service permits counting of DPNSS 1 transit PBXs and rejecting a call when the count exceeds a predetermined limit Programming Loop avoidance Set Loop avoidance during the hardware configuration l Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press 2J 6 6J6 4 AJ CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi Press 7 2 7 6 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Extns Press Press Press Next until the display shows Hardware Show The display shows Card Tare DPHSS 1 Show The display shows Max transits 825 The default is the maximum value of 25 Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Feature guick reference e Modular Plus feature codes 316 e ISDN terminal features 318 e Cordless handset features 320 ATA extension features 321 P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 316 Feature guick reference Modular Plus feature cod
143. e call that you want to keep is automatically put on hold 2 Press The call is disconnected 3 Press the line key of the held call to speak to the remaining person M7100N T7100 telephones 1 Press to place one caller on hold 2 Press again to put the caller you want to keep on hold 3 Press The first call is disconnected 4 Press to speak to the remaining party M7000 T7000 telephones 1 Press Z B to place one caller on hold 2 Press sdh to put the caller you want to keep on hold 3 Press The first call is disconnected 4 Press sdh to speak to the remaining party Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Making external calls 255 Using Hold on a conference If you use Hold on a conference you can putthe two other people on hold they cannot speak to each other put the conference on hold the other two people can speak to each other put one person on hold while you continue to talk to the other person You can reconnect to the conference by pressing either of the held line keys For M7100N T7100 and M7000 T7000 telephones press Separately holding two calls For all system digital telephones except the M7100N T7100 and M7000 T7000 telephones you can put the two people in a conference call on hold independently so that they cannot talk to each other 1 Press the line key of one person The other person is a
144. e filters Each programmable filter can have up to 48 restrictions There is no limit on the number of overrides that can be allocated to a restriction You can use any restriction or override in more than one filter Each time it is used it counts as one entry For example if restriction 411 exists in filters 01 02 and 03 it uses up three of the 400 entries available The maximum length of a restriction is 15 digits The maximum length of an override is 16 digits You can use and in a sequence of numbers in either a restriction or an override These characters are often used as part of feature codes for other systems or for features provided by the PSTN The solid dot can represent any digit It is inserted by pressing the display key under AH P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 84 Barring calls and privileges Restrictions When you are finished programming restrictions for one telephone you can copy those settings to other telephones by using COPY at the Restrictions k display For more information about copying telephone programming see Copying programming for telephones on page 147 You cannot delete a filter but you can delete a restriction within a filter Removing the restrictions programmed on a filter makes it an unrestricted filter but the filter itself is not removed ATTENTION Removing a restriction changes the identifying number of the restric
145. e in a route for a particular destination code ensures that all calls being routed to that destination use ISDN lines You must ensure that extensions and ISDN terminals have access to the line pools that they need to make calls programmed under Line Access in Lines See Chart 19 Routing service on page 341 in Appendix A for a programming overview P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 164 Programming Services Programming routes Use DialOut 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 61 68 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Passwords 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Exths 4 Press Next _ until the display shows Serwices 5 Press Show The display shows Ringing service 6 Press Next until the display shows Routing service 7 Press Show The display shows Routes 8 Press Show The display shows Show routes 9 Enter a three digit route code or press 10 Press Show _ The display shows Dial ut 11 Press CHAHGE 12 Enter the Dial Out digits up to 24 or press CAHCL to choose Ha namber Note You can press to insert a 1 5 second pause in the dialling string if necessary Note Route 000 shows Fool by default and cannot be changed 13 Press OK Use Pool 1 Begin with DialOut step 10 of previous procedure 2
146. e in the system it is much easier to detect hung lines When lines become hung as a result of a call being directed into or through your system on a private circuit they become hung in pairs The hung line pair consists of one private circuit and one exchange line or private circuit If network lines become hung regularly this indicates a problem with your network configuration Clearing a hung line l 121824 10 11 Power failure Press Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Check the line number of the hung line using 0 the Key Inquiry feature 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Password Press 7 2 7 6 6 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terninals amp Extrs Press Next until the display shows Maintenance Press Show The display shows System version Press Next The display shows Clear lines Press The display shows the number of the first busy line in the system followed by the time in hours and minutes that the line has been busy If there are no hung lines the display shows Ha bus lines for a short time then Clear lines If this is not the line you want to clear press until the line you want to clear is displayed Press CLEAR to disconnect the line The display confirms that the line has been cleared Press to exit or to continue in programming If the power fails your Modular Plus system maintains
147. e the call You can assign a line to only one group 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fassword I 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals amp Estrs Press Next until the display shows System Fra mina Press Show The display shows Hunt Srours Press Show The display shows Show 3raur Enter the hunt group number you want to programme 01 30 Press Show The display shows Member extns oe 1 SO OS Press Next The display shows Line assignment 10 Press Show The display shows Show lines 11 Enter the line number you want to programme press SEAH to go the first line assigned to this group or press LIST to go to the first line in the system 12 Press CHAHGE to programme the line as Unassigned or Assigned HGnn means the line is assigned to another hunt group 13 Press 48 to exit or to continue programming P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 124 Programming Hunt groups Assigning a distinctive ring pattern to a Hunt Group You can assign distinctive ring patterns to your Hunt Group so that calls can be rated in priority for the group These distinctive ring patterns have the same characteristics as for line and set distinctive ring patterns Refer to Sorting calls by distinctive ring patterns on page 228
148. e the callers must wait for the Forward no answer feature to automatically transfer the call after several rings For example Mr Forbes knows that most client calls arrive in the morning but he will be in meetings until noon He forwards his extension to Ms Smith who can deal with issues right away Press then the extension number that you wish to send the calls to If your extension is a member of a hunt group the Call Forward all calls setting is overridden by the hunt group routing See Forwarding your calls on page 269 Call Pickup Directed If any telephone is ringing in your office you can answer it from your extension For example only a few people are in the office early in the morning When Miss Vale s telephone rings Mr Forbes takes the call using Call Pickup Directed Press 6 then dial the extension of the telephone that is ringing See Answering a telephone using Directed Pickup on page 234 Call Pickup Group If your telephone is part of a Pickup Group you can answer calls ringing on any telephone in the same group For example Mr Forbes and Ms Smith both belong to Pickup Group 3 When Mr Forbes is away from his extension Ms Smith uses the Call Pickup Group feature on her own extension to answer Mr Forbes s calls Press 5 See Answering a telephone using Pickup Group on page 235 Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 System programmin
149. ears beside Intercom extensions button and the SWCA indicator becomes solid on all extensions indicating that the call is active Outgoing calls When you make an outgoing call using the intercom key on your telephone the call is automatically transferred to the first available SWCA key Solid indicators appear beside the intercom button and the SWCA key on your telephone All other telephones in the group also see a solid indicator beside the SWCA key indicating that the line for that key is in use If you put the call on hold the SWCA key indicator fast flashes on your telephone and slow flashes on the other telephones in the group The call can then be picked up by any other telephone in the group No free call keys If all the SWCA keys are currently occupied when a new call comes in you can still put the call on Hold IfaSWCA key has been freed up between the time you answered the call and when you put the call on Hold the call will transfer to the free SWCA key and act as described in Incoming calls on page 231 Ifall SWCA keys are still occupied when you put the new call on Hold the call will be held at your telephone on the line it came in on When a SWCA key becomes free you can take the call off hold and transfer it to a SWCA key so it has a group wide appearance These principles also apply to outgoing calls Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110
150. ect one 12 Use ADD FIND and REMOWE to change the destination code Normal rte Select which route a call using the destination code will take during normal service and for each of the schedules The automatic schedule times are programmed under Services The default Normal route is 000 which has no DialOut digits and uses Pool A Note Be sure you have pre programmed the route before you do this procedure See Designating alternate routes for calls on page 161 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Passard 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Exths 4 Press Next until the display shows Services 5 Press Show _ The display shows Ringing service 6 Press Next until the display shows Routing service 7 Press Show The display shows Routes Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Programming Services 167 8 Press Nex The display shows Dest codes 9 Press Show _ The display shows Show DstCode 10 If there are no codes defined use ADD the keypad and OK to a new destination code up to 7 To enter a wild card character in the destination code press the AHY display key 11 Press Show _ The display shows Hormal 12 Press CHAHGE to select a different route for the destination code 13 Enter the three dig
151. ed to this telephone 13 Press 3 to exit or to continue in programming Every Answer extension number assigned to the telephone automatically assigns an Answer key with an indicator to the telephone These keys should be labelled accordingly identifying the telephone with its name or extension number More than one telephone can have an Answer key for the same extension number In this way more than one telephone can provide Call Alerting and Call Answering for any calls directed to that extension number A private line does not generate alerting at an Answer key Note You cannot assign Answer extension numbers to an M7100N or a T7100 telephone or to a single line telephone connected to an Analogue Terminal Adapter Setting the Originating Line Identification for an extension Outgoing calls on a Direct Inward Access DIA line use an Originating Line Identification OLD number which appears on the telephone display of the called party as part of the calling line identification CLID Modular Plus allows you to programme the OLI number for each extension The OLI number could be the Public Received number for the DIA line assigned to the extensions or it could be a different Public Received number if you wish calls to be returned to someone else s extension Ensure that the OLI numbers are in the same range as the received digits that come from the exchange For example a sales manager may wish to have returned calls d
152. ed with a hunt group 1 Dial the extension number you want to reach 2 Before you hang up press Cancelling Ring Again Press 2 Displays Can t ring again You cannot use Ring Again on your current call You can only use Ring Again while you have a busy signal on an internal call or line pool request or while an internal call is ringing Ring Again Press YES to use Ring Again Press HO if YES HO EXIT you prefer to send a message P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 284 Saving time with features Using Hotline Hotline A Hotline telephone calls a pre set internal or external telephone number when you pick up the handset of a Hotline telephone or press the button labelled Handsfree Label the telephone to inform anyone using it that Hotline is active Bypassing a Hotline Press a line key use the Pre Dial or Automatic Dial feature or press the button labelled Handsfree before you pick up the handset on a hotline telephone Refer to Telephone Feature Card Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Using display features e Time and Date 286 Static Time 286 e Call duration time 286 Call Information 287 e Call log 288 e Autobumping 293 e Call Charge 293 P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 286 Using display features Time and Date The current time and da
153. ements for distance networking Other features are new Available DPNSS 1 features are Three Party Service similar to Norstar Conference e Diversion similar to Norstar Call Forward Redirection Call Offer Executive Intrusion similar to Norstar Priority Call Route optimisation Message waiting indication Loop avoidance Some features are transparent to the user but must be programmed to be activated Others are available for end user programming at the extension Programming The following parameters can be configured for DPNNS I lines Line Type Prime Extension CLID Extension Auto Privacy Answer Mode Auxiliary Ringer Full auto Hold Refer to the Programming overview on page 24 for details on system defaults and programming for DPNSS 1 Three Party Service Three Party Service is a DPNSS 1 feature for Norstar similar to the Norstar Conference feature In fact using the feature at an extension is identical in all respects to the Conference feature The Three Party Service allows a user often an operator to establish a three party conference by calling two other parties from one extension Once the connection is made the controlling party can hang up leaving the other two connected The controlling party can even put one party on hold and talk to the other party This feature is basically designed to allow operators to assist in the connection of calls from one main locat
154. emory keys using B to assign the SWCA feature codes 0 to 5 6 Refer Setting SWCA controls on page 143 for information about determining how the system will assign calls to SWCA keys and how the Hold feature will perform Note Each group telephone must either have a line appearance of the call coming in or a free intercom button to be able to retrieve a SWCA call The number of SWCA keys that can be assigned will depend on available buttons on the telephone T7316 T7316E and T7324N telephones provide the broadest use of this feature Companion M7000 T7000 and M7100N T7100 telephones do not have line or intercom buttons therefore they cannot be assigned SWCA buttons However they can be used to park and unpark SWCA calls by entering the codes on the dial pad to enter the SWCA code for a call Your system administrator can also configure SWCA buttons during the initial configuration of your telephone Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Answering calls 231 Auto Hold Your telephone must be set to have Full autohold if you want to use SWCA lines so that a call automatically gets placed on hold if the user answers a second call If the telephone does not do this the user can change the system setting at the telephone using B Call Park The Call Park access code must be active for SWCA buttons to work This means that it cannot be set to 0 Incoming calls When you answer
155. en programmed for the key P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 220 Customising your telephones Moving line keys Labelling keys on the telephone After programming a key on your telephone you may wish to label it Norstar M series telephones also have key pre labelled key caps When you are labelling or removing a key cap activate Key Inguiry Ce 0 first so that you do not accidentally activate a feature Note On M7100N T7100 telephones Key Inguiry shows your extension number followed by the function assigned to your single memory key This is usually Last Number Redial To remove a keycap slip the fingernails of your index fingers under each end of the keycap and pull up until it pops off If you do not have a printed keycap to replace it you can write the name in the blank label space beside the key The T series telephones are labelled beside the buttons You can use the Desktop Assistant utility to make changes and print a new label card Your system administrator can access this application from the system CD or download it from http www nortelnetworks com Customer Support Software Distribution under Product Selection choose Desktop Assistant You can move exchange lines to different keys on your telephone Use this feature to arrange your lines as you prefer 1 Press r 2 Press the key you want to move the line from 3 Press the key you want to move the line to 4
156. ension relocation is set to No ATTENTION Wait 1 minute between moves After moving a telephone wait 1 minute before moving the telephone a second time or changing the telephone extension number The CCU may take up to 60 seconds to recognise that a telephone moved to a new location ATTENTION Don t fill the vacated socket before relocating the telephone When moving a telephone with Extension relocation turned on do not connect another telephone to the vacated socket before connecting the first telephone to a new extension socket If you connect a telephone of the same type to the vacated extension socket the newly connected telephone will receive the programming of the original telephone If you connect a telephone of a different type to the vacated extension socket the newly connected telephone will receive default programming and the original programming will be lost Turn Extension relocation to No after the telephone installation and programming are completed rather than before This provides you with more flexibility in testing equipment If Extension relocation is set to No while a telephone is moved that extension number and data remain with the physical port on the central control unit CCU and the telephone does not receive the original programming when it is reconnected elsewhere Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Moving and copying 147 Remember to re
157. ent 7 Press until the display shows OLI 8 Press CHAHGE and enter the number 9 Press L to exit or to continue in programming Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Programming Hospitality Services e Hospitality extensions 50 e Alarm time AL feature 51 e Hospitality Services admin alarm feature 53 e Room occupancy RO 54 e Room condition RC 55 e Service time 57 P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 50 Programming Hospitality Services Hospitality Services HS is a group of features that increases the value of the Modular Plus system in small to medium sized hotels motels or hospitals In a hotel setting guests gain improved services through immediate access to basic functions like wake up service or reminders accurate tracking of the room service requirements for example check in check out Hospitality Services features must be activated by qualified personnel using Software keycodes See Software Keys on page 60 Hospitality extensions Norstar BST extensions are classified as one of following types of telephones Common extension A common extension can be a telephone found in a lobby office or common area It is not associated with a room A common extension does not have access to all HS features Common extensions are Norstar BST extensions or analogue
158. ent 151 Settings for analogue equipment 152 Setting the delay before the ATA answers 152 Changing the dial mode of an ATA 153 Setting whether the ATA should receive system tones 154 Setting whether an ATA is used on site or off site 155 Programming Services 157 Using alternate or scheduled services 158 Turning Services on or off 158 Ringing service 159 Designating alternate routes for calls 161 Programming routes 164 Programming destination codes 165 Turning a manual service on or off with a feature code 168 Assigning control extensions 168 Changing the name of a schedule 170 Changing the time of a schedule 170 Passwords 171 P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide Password security 172 Setting the SAPLUS password 172 Setting the Administrator password 173 Setting the Basic password 173 Hospitality passwords 174 Setting the Registration password 175 Call services 177 Erasing a forgotten Call log password 178 Programming Call services 178 Ist Display 178 Auto called ID 179 Remote access 181 Programming lines and features for remote access 182 Adding cordless capability 185 Cordless Capabilities 186 Registration password 187 Turning on Master Registration 188 Checking if an extension is available for registration 189 De registering an extension number for a cordless handset 190 Turning off Master Registration 191 What to tell your colleagues 191 Maintenance 193 Beginning a
159. ent codes 9 Press to exit or to continue in programming P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 196 Maintenance System administration log Sys admin log Log item Time of log item Number of repetitions Time and date that log was checked Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Troubleshooting e Recording and reporting alarm codes 198 Clearing lines 198 e Power failure 199 e Power fail telephone 200 e Troubleshooting a cordless handset 200 P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 198 Troubleshooting Recording and reporting alarm codes Occasionally you may encounter a problem with your Modular Plus system either from internal or external causes You need to know the following thealarm extension that displays messages when there are problems how to recognise and clear hung lines when a power failure occurs what happens to the system When there is a problem the Modular Plus system generates a message called an alarm code on the Alarm extension You assign a Norstar Business Series Terminal BST extension with a two line display T7316 T7316E M7310N or M7324N to be the alarm extension If an alarm code appears on the display of the Alarm extension 1 Record the alarm code 2
160. er of one other telephone in the Modular Plus system The person you call hears a tone before your voice call comes through Hunt groups cannot accept voice calls Making a Voice Call 1 Press 6 6 2 Dial the extension for the person you want to speak to 3 Wait for the beep then speak Muting voice call tones When a voice call begins at your telephone you hear a beep every 15 seconds as a reminder that the microphone is on To stop the beeping pick up the handset or press the key labelled Handsfree mute or Mute Preventing Voice Calls to your telephone You can use Voice Call Deny to prevent your telephone from receiving voice calls Press Voice calls ring as do regular internal calls Your other calls proceed normally To cancel press B Answering a voice call without touching your telephone If Handsfree Answerback is assigned to your telephone you can respond to a voice call without touching the telephone Handsfree Answerback is not available to M7100N T7100 or M7000 T7000 telephones When someone makes a voice call to you simply start talking Your telephone microphone picks up your voice Once you have answered a voice call you treat it as a normal call P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 266 Making internal calls Displays Dial voice call Dial the extension number or press the internal autodial key of the person to whom you want to speak Microphone mute
161. er the ATA should receive system tones 154 e Setting whether an ATA is used on site or off site 155 P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 152 Settings for analogue eguipment Settings for analogue eguipment Analogue eguipment includes answering machines fax machines and analogue telephones Analogue eguipment is connected to the Modular Plus system through the Integrated Analogue Terminal Adapter I ATA or with an external Analogue Terminal Adapter ATA The Modular Plus system includes one I ATA port Additional ATA ports must be added externally by purchasing optional eguipment External ATA and Internal ATA support different features The I ATA supports only one set and the external ATA supports multiple sets The internal ATA responds only to incoming tone dialling signals The ATA and I ATA allow analogue telephones to access some Norstar features such as Call Forward Conference Transfer and Last Number Redial Telephones connected to the ATA or I ATA cannot display the time and date For information on using Norstar features from an external analogue telephone connected to an ATA refer to Analogue Terminal Adapter User Card You can adjust the following settings change the number of rings the analogue equipment waits before answering a call change the extension used for analogue equipment to receive tone dialling signals set whether an external ATA is required and whethe
162. ere are no spaces allocated by default Changing the space allocation using Log defaults defines the log space available to all telephones in the system Any remaining unassigned log space is available in a log pool and can be re allocated under Terminals amp Extns Re allocating call log space may destroy call log data at telephones that lose space See Call log on page 288 for information about using the Call log feature Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Programming feature settings 141 Alarm extension 2 DTS ME 11 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fassumordi Press 7 2 7 5 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Extns Press Next until the display shows System Frarmina Press Show _ The display shows Hunt 9rours Press Next until the display shows Featr settings Press Show _ The display shows Backarnd music Press Next until the display shows Call log space Press Show _ The display shows Reset all logs Press YES and use the keypad to enter the space allocation for the call log at each telephone You must use a three digit number for example 020 to give 12 extensions 20 spaces each Press YES to accept the settings and end programming The system automatically re allocates Log space Press HO to reset the n
163. es Using Modular Plus features 1 Press and enter the desired feature code on the dial pad OR Press the programmed memory key 2 Follow the display messages If you change your mind while entering a feature code press to cancel If you use the key to end a feature you may drop an active call To display what has been programmed on a memory key enter 0 the Key Inquiry feature code and press the memory key Note Norstar extensions accept voice calls only Video and data calls do not alert a Norstar extension Feature To activate To cancel Autobumping Call Logs 81006 BE Background music 8 6 6 6 Call Camp on B P Call Duration Timer 71 7 Call Forward All Calls a Call log aJe Call log options 8 4 Call log password 8 6 Call Parking 7 4 Call Pickup Directed 7 6 Call Pickup Group 716 Call Gueuing 8 6 f Class of service password 6 B Conference 8 Contrast adjustment Z Dialling modes 812 Do Not Disturb B E B 6 Group listen 8 0 E HBe Hold ES Holding a call exclusively 7 9 Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Feature guick reference 317
164. es for that DIA line to 2 For example in the case of a Presence video terminal the first call establishes a 1B video connection and the second call establishes the 2B video connection Cordless handset features Availability of features may vary with the model of cordless handset The following list provides an approximate guide to the Modular Plus features available For more information see the feature card for your model of cordless handset For more information on the operation of the cordless handset see the user guide for that model Features for cordless handsets Call Forward All Calls Conference Line pools Recall e Retrieve a parked call Speed Dial Transfer Trunk Answer Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Feature guick reference 321 ATA extension features The Analogue Terminal Adapter ATA connects a digital Norstar telephone port to a standard analogue voice device It is most commonly used to attach to a single line telephone or a data communication device such as a modem or facsimile machine Refer to the ATA Terminal Feature Card for complete information Feature To activate To cancel Alternate line Link J 2 Call Forward Link E A Call parking Link Ha Call pick up Directed L
165. es the minimum number of digits that an external call must match to an existing system speed dial number in order for the system to offer a name display for the CLID prompt if the system speed dial number is set up to display the caller name Refer to Setting System speed dial on page 64 l O Pa aS 10 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fassuardi Press 2 6 6 8 J 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Terminals Extns Press Next until the display shows System Fr9rming Press Show _ The display shows Hunt 9rours Press Next until the display shows Featr settings Press Show _ The display shows Backarnd music H Press Next until the display shows CLID match 8 Press CHAHGE to select the a number from 3 to 8 or select None if you do not require any number matching Press to exit or to continue programming Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Moving and copying e Extension relocation 146 e Copying programming for telephones 147 P0607110 Issue O1 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 146 Moving and copying Extension relocation The Extension relocation feature allows you to move a telephone from one extension socket to another without losing any of its custom programming or its assigned extension number By default Ext
166. ess 7 Press Next until the display shows Restrictions 8 Press Show The display shows Restrn filters 9 Press Next The display shows Extn restrns 10 Press Show _ The display shows Filters 11 Press Next The display shows ExtnLack 12 Press CHAHGE to select None Full or Partial 13 Press 48 to exit or to continue in programming Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Barring calls and privileges Restrictions 95 Preventing Last Number Redial Under some conditions a telephone may be used by customers or clients You can prevent non employees from accessing sensitive numbers by blocking certain features at the telephone The default setting allows an extension to use the Last Number Redial feature See Chart 8 Extension restrictions on page 331 in Appendix A for a programming overview 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fassword 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Extns 4 Press Show _ The display shows Show extri 5 Enter the extension number of the telephone you want to programme The display shows rninn innr 6 Press Show The display shows Line access 7 Press Next until the display shows Restrictions 8 Press Show The display shows Restrn filters 9 Press Next The display
167. ess Next The display shows the facility 13 Press CHANGE until the display shows the facility you want Options are Use prime line Use line Pool code or Use routing tabl ATTENTION If you want to be able to forward calls to an external direct dial telephone the facility needs to be set to use the routing table or a prime line where the prime line is set to Intercom 14 If you choose Use line or Pool code you must enter a line number or pool code If you choose Use routing tabl you must enter a destination code 15 Press 48 to exit or to continue in programming P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 80 Assigning a Direct Dial extension Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Barring calls and privileges Restrictions e Using restriction filters to bar calls 82 e Assigning filters to a telephone Extn restrns 85 e Assigning filters to a line Line restrns 86 e Assigning filters to a specific line or extension 87 e Class of service password 88 e Assigning a remote access filter 91 e Locking an extension 94 e Preventing Last Number Redial 95 e Preventing Saved Number Redial 95 e Preventing Recall 96 e Preventing Redirect 97 P0607110 Issue O1 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 82 Barring calls and privileges Restrictions
168. ess CHAHGE to enter new password Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Charts 343 Chart 21 Call log passwords Passwords t SHOW COS Fsuds i HEAT Call lod Fsuds i SHOW Show extn Enter extension number SHOW Log Pswd Press CHANGE to reset password to Hane i P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 344 Charts Chart 22 Call services Terminals Extns SHOW A Show extnti Enter extension number SHOW Line access J HEXT Carabilities MEXT 4 times Call services i SHOW Auto call info MEST istDisrlay Press CHANGE to choose between Numbr and Line i HEST Auto Called ID Press CHANGE to choose between Yes and H No Log space Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 A ACISA assigning a filter 91 Administration password erasing 173 setting up 173 Advice line contacting 39 Alarm extension 141 alpha tagging system speed dial 65 Analogue equipment settings 152 Analogue Terminal Adapter delay before answering 152 dial mode 153 feature codes 321 system tones 154 used off site 155 used on site 155 Answer extension call coverage 142 Answer keys assigning to an extension 46 using 236 answering calls Call Pickup 234 distinctive ring patterns 228 external 228 hunt group calls 229 internal 228 gueued 229 using SWCA keys 230 ANY key Index desti
169. ess CHANGE to choose between English and Orratna HEST Disrlau cntrst Press CHAHGE to select level HEST Ring ture i Press CHANGE to select ring type 1 4 Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Charts 337 Chart 14 Extension relocation System Frarmina SHOW Hunt Srours HEXT Featr settings SHOW Back9rnd music j HEXT 16 times Extn relocatn Press CHANGE to choose between Yes and H No P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 338 Charts Chart 15 Copying settings SHOW Terminals Extns Show extn i Enter extension number 221 221 Press COPY Press CHANGE to choose between SYSTEM data SYSTEM dat S a and S STEM LISER HEXT HEXT Cory to If SINGLE or RANGE is selected enter extension number s as prompted COPY SS INGLE Press CHAHGE to select SIHGLE RAHGE or ALL Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Charts 339 Chart 16 ATA settings Terminals Extns SHOW Show extn Enter extension number for the ATA SHOW Line access i MEST Carabilities SHOW Fud ho answer f HEXT 14 times ATA settings r SHOW ATA ans timer Press CHANGE to select 3 5 7 or 18 seconds j HEAT ATA mode Press CHANGE to choose between Tone and Pulse is HEXT ATA tones Press CHANGE to choose between Yes and
170. ess CLR 10 Press Next 11 Press 68 to exit or to continue in programming Soe P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 94 Barring calls and privileges Restrictions Locking an extension You can limit the number of features that can be used or programmed at a particular extension The options are None default not locked You can programme any system or extension setting Full fully locked You can programme only these settings display contrast ring type ring volume and volume control Partial partly locked You can programme most extension settings You cannot programme system settings Personal Speed Dial codes dialling mode or memory keys and you cannot move line keys or enable Voice Call Deny Note Do not apply extension lock to the telephone you use to programme the system There must be at least one two line display telephone in the system that has Extension Lock set to None or you will not be able to programme the system Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fassworg I Press 7 2 7 6 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals amp extrs Press Show _ The display shows Show extr t 5 Enter the extension number of the telephone you want to programme The displays shows nnninnr 6 Press Show The display shows Line acc
171. eve a parked call by dialling the retrieval code As many as 25 calls can be parked at one time on the Modular Plus system When you park a call the system assigns a retrieval code These codes consist of the Call Parking prefix which may be any digit from 1 to 9 and a two digit call number between 01 and 25 For example if the Call Parking prefix is 4 the first parked call is assigned Call Parking retrieval code 401 The Modular Plus system assigns Call Parking codes in seguence from the lowest to the highest until all the codes are used This round robin approach means that a greater variety of codes are used which makes it easier for a call to reach the right person when more than one incoming call is parked The highest call number the Call Parking prefix followed by 25 is used only by M7100N T7100 and M7000 T7000 telephones or devices connected to the system using an Analogue Terminal Adapter You programme the Call Parking prefix and the time delay before parked calls are returned to the originating telephone under Access Codes External calls parked for longer than the programmed delay are returned to the Prime extension Answered hunt group calls are parked in the same manner as other calls Call Parking can be disabled by your System Administrator You must have Call Parking active to use the SWCA keys Parking a call 1 While on a call press 4 The display shows the Call Parking retrieval code 2 Use 6 0
172. g you can programme members of a group member position in a group e the lines assigned to a group the distribution of incoming calls the length of time the system looks for available agents before sending the call to the overflow position how the system handles calls if all agents are busy Note Do not programme videophones as members of a hunt group Hunt groups allow one B channel connection at a time and videophones use two B channels Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Programming Hunt groups 121 Adding or removing members from a group Modular Plus supports 30 groups with a maximum of 600 members system wide Members of the group can be any Norstar or Business Series Terminal extension DNA ISDN extension or cordless handsets An extension can be in multiple hunt groups however each occurrence increases the total number of members in the system There can be one appearance of the same hunt group on a set The extension number range for the 30 hunt groups is 551 to 580 The extension numbers in this range cannot be members of a hunt group l SOON Er 10 11 12 13 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fassworg I Press 7 2 7 5 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Exths Press Next until the display shows System Frarmi
173. g distance calls exist by default The following table shows the default restriction filters that the Modular Plus system provides Filter 01 prevents you from dialling any number that begins with 0 or 1 except when the number begins with 0 800 Filter 05 prevents you from dialling any number that begins with 010 1 and 00 Filter 06 prevents you from dialling numbers that begin with any digit Filters 04 31 32 33 are used for Line Redirection If you add restrictions to them it will affect the Line Redirection function Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Barring calls and privileges Restrictions 83 Restriction filter defaults Filter Restrictions denied Overrides 00 No restrictions cannot be changed 01 01 0 001 0800 02 1 02 No restrictions 03 No restrictions 04 31 No restrictions 32 33 05 01 010 02 1 03 00 06 01 the dot represents any digit 07 99 No restrictions or overrides programmed Note Emergency numbers 000 and 1144 can be restricted in any filter Customising a call barring filter You can customise default filters for your needs before you apply them You can create a new restriction filter add or remove restrictions add or remove overrides Rules for adding and creating filters You can have up to 100 restriction filters There is a maximum of 400 restrictions and overrides allocated to the 100 programmabl
174. g extension numbers if you have other single extensions that you wish to programme Press CAHCL when you are finished Copying system programming to a range of extensions 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Exths Press and enter the extension number whose programming you want to copy Press COF The display shows Cors 54 STEM data Press CHAHGE to toggle between SYSTEM data to copy the programming of the system and SYSTEM HISER to copy the programming of the system and the programming of a particular extension Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Moving and copying 149 10 11 12 13 14 Press Next The display shows Lara 5IHGLE Press CHAHGE to select either a range of extensions or all extensions Press Next The display shows Only eauirrd Ext Press CHAHGE to switch between equipped extensions and all extensions Press Next _ The display shows Begin at Enter the starting extension number The display shows End ati Enter the ending extension number The display shows MAFIA Press OF to copy the programming to the specified extensions Depending on the activities going on in the system a copy may not take effect for a while The brief display you see
175. g introduction 37 Call Queuing When more than one call is ringing at your extension you can ensure you answer the calls in the order they arrived For example Mr Cassidy notices that he has calls on Line 3 and on line 4 He does not know which call arrived first so he uses Call Queuing to answer Press Ce J 0 1 J See Answering the next queued call on page 229 Do Not Disturb If you do not want to be interrupted by any telephone calls turn on the Do Not Disturb feature so that calls are immediately transferred to the Prime extension For example Mr Moore is having a performance review meeting with the president of the company Mr Moore turns on Do Not Disturb before the meeting so that all calls are routed to the attendant Press 5 A hunt group extension can temporarily leave the hunt group by activating this feature See Do Not Disturb on page 224 Line redirection You can use the Line redirection feature to redirect the calls coming in on your external lines to a telephone outside the office You can redirect exchange lines to AC15A private circuits AC15A private circuits to either exchange lines or private circuits and exchange lines to exchange lines You may choose to redirect all your external lines or only some of them For example you generally receive personal calls on Line 1 and customer calls on Line 2 You can redirect Line 2 to a colleague when you are busy but still acce
176. g the Administrator ADMIN password can also be accessed using the System Administrator Plus SAPLUS password P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 26 System programming introduction Programming overview Startup Template PBX Square Hybrid Start Extension 221 Terminals amp Extns Show exin _ Line access Line assignment Show line _ Non DIA line L001 Ring only Appr amp Ring Appr only Unassigned DIA line line 255 to 382 L255 Ring only Appr amp Ring Appr only Unassigned Appearances 1 LinePool access Line Pool A N and O Y Line Pool B to M N Prime line None PoolA Pool N Pool O Intem Intercom keys 2 0 to 8 Answer extns Show extn _ 221 Unassigned Appr amp Ring Appr only OLI Extn Capabilities Fwd no answer Fwd to None Forward delay 2 3 4 6 10 Fwd on busy Fwd to None DND on busy 221 N others Y Handsfree None Auto Std HF answerback Y Pickup grp None 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Page zone None 1 2 3 4 5 6 Paging Y D Dial None Extn1 Extn2 Extn3 Extn4 Extn5 Priority call N Hotline None Intrnl Extrnl if Extrnl Use prime line Use line Pool code Use routing tabl Aux ringer N Redirect ring Y Receive tones N ATA settings ATA ans timer 3 5 7 10 ATA mode Tone Pulse ATA tones N ATA use On site Off site Intrusion Protect lvl None Low Med High Name Extn User prefernces I Mdl M7208N M7310N M732
177. ge the setting to Yes for a line pool the telephone being programmed can access any line in that line pool l 9 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press 2 66 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Password I Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals amp extrs Press Show _ The display shows Show extn Enter the extension number of the telephone you want to programme The display shows nnn innr Press twice The display shows Line a i3rmenit Press Next The display shows LinePoal access Press until you reach the line pool you want to show the number for Note Only assigned line pools appear on the list Press CHAHGE to select the setting N No or Y Yes 10 Press gt to exit or to continue in programming Assigning a Prime line to an extension This setting assigns a Prime line to the telephone When the telephone is being used to make an outgoing call the Prime line is the first line the system selects l Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press 2 66 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Password i Press 7 2 7 6 6 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals E tns Press Show _ The display shows Show extn Enter the extension number of the telephone you want to programme The display shows nnn innr Modular P
178. ger notifies when a line rings e You can bar long distance calls by applying Restriction service to a line or extension in a service schedule You can take advantage of alternate route selection by assigning different routes to be used during the different schedules Turning Services on or off is used to turn ringing services on and off Refer to Turning a manual service on or off with a feature code on page 168 Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Programming Services 159 Ringing service You can have Ringing service set up to run differently for each of the six schedules You may decide you want Ringing service for the Night schedule to come into effect only when it is turned on and off manually If you manually call on a service it remains in effect until you cancel it regardless of any automatic modes scheduled Manual service also overrides any automatic mode that is active If you programme a service as Manual you must use the control extension to turn the service on using a feature code The default control extension for all lines and extensions is 221 See Chart 17 Ringing service on page 340 in Appendix A for a programming overview 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 6 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Password 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals E
179. gramming Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Programming Services 161 Routing service Instead of having to manually decide which routes to use at different times of the day you can set the routes to be automatically selected according to the programmed settings for each of the six schedules Designating alternate routes for calls The programming for Routing service decides what path an outgoing call takes using the digits that are dialled When you select an internal line and dial the numbers you enter are checked against the routes If the number you dialled starts with a destination code the system uses the line pool and dials out digits specified by the route assigned to that destination code and then dials the number that you dialled Routing service replaces a number of tasks that otherwise have to be done manually including entering a line pool code dialling an access code for a long distance carrier accessing an alternate route if the Prime line is busy or unavailable Uniform numbering plan Modular Plus can be programmed to provide dialling transparency by using a uniform numbering plan For example a worker at the head office in London can call a colleague at a branch office in Birmingham as though they were calling an extension in their own office Dialling transparency depends on establishing a numbering plan where all extension numbers are unique and of a uniform lengt
180. gress but confuse a modem or fax machine Ifthe ATA is connected to a telephone set tones to Y Ifthe ATA is connected to any other device set tones to N The default is No Note This setting does not interfere with intrusion and conference tones on a telephone connected to an ATA These tones are heard through the telephone handset regardless of the ATA tones setting 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Extns 4 Press Show The display show Show extn Enter the extension number of the telephone you want to programme The display shows nnn innr Un 6 Press Show The display shows Line access 7 Press Next The display shows Carabilities 8 Press Show The display shows Fud no answer 9 Press Next until the display shows ATA settings 10 Press Show The display shows ATA ans timeri 11 Press Next until the display shows ATA tones 12 Press CHANGE to choose Y Yes or N No 13 Press 48 to exit or to continue in programming Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Settings for analogue eguipment 155 Setting whether an ATA is used on site or off site The external ATA can connect Modular Plus to analogue telephones modems or answeri
181. h For example if you have three company sites two in London and one in Birmingham then all three sites should have the same number of digits in their extension numbers and each extension number should be unique When performing System Start up you can change the starting value and length of extension numbers as well as the received number length If you apply the PBX template at System Start up received numbers and the received number length are set automatically to match the extension numbers P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 162 Programming Services How Routing service works There are two headings for Routing service Routes and Dest codes Under Routes you programme PialOut and Use DialOut specifies the digits up to 24 to be dialled out to reach the called extension Use defines a specific line pool to be used to make the call Under Dest codes you programme the Destination route and Absorb length Normal is for assigning the route code to be used during regular business hours Absorb length indicates how many of the digits in the destination code should be absorbed by the system not dialled out to reach the called extension When a caller dials a number Modular Plus checks the leading digits of the number against the destination codes If the leading digits are matched to a destination code Modular Plus proceeds to select the route containing the appropriate l
182. hanging the time and date The system time and date appear on the display of idle Business Series Terminals BST and Norstar telephones M7100N T7100 telephones connected to an Analogue Terminal Adapter cannot display the time and date If the mains power is interrupted you have to reset the time and date Note You only need to change the time and date at one Norstar BST telephone and the clock resets for the entire system If you have BRA lines then your time and date automatically corrects itself when an outgoing call is answered See Automatic Time amp Date on page 76 The clock also controls the schedules used for services such as ringing and routing After a power failure the clock is behind by the length of time the power was lost For example if the power is out for two minutes the clock is two minutes behind To quickly change the time one hour ahead or one hour back use FWD or BACK features on Changing the time by an hour on page 76 Changing the time 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Password 3 Press 2 8 J 6 J 4 6 ADMIN The display shows Terminals amp eEstrs Press until the display shows Time Date Press Show _ The display shows Hours Press CHAHGE or HEXT if you do not need to change the hour Enter the hour 00 to 23 If the number is less than 13 the displ
183. hat allows applications running on the PC to access the Modular Plus D channel signalling and B2 data channels VIOC requires D channel signals The voice systhesiser card is an add on for the PC that is capable of performing text to speech synthesis The volume and speed of the synthesised speech can be adjusted by the user The analogue mixer card is an add on for the PC that takes the analogue signal from the voice synthesiser and mixes it with the headset audio output from the M7324N extension The result is sent to the headset port of the mixer card The mixer card does not provide any volume control To use the VIOC function the display language needs to be set to Operating See Changing the display language on page 117 for instructions Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 About your system telephones 213 Common feature display messages You may see the following displays when using a feature Access denied Denied in admin Feature timeout Inactive feature Invalid code Hot available Set locked 1234567890123 WTEW OK 239221 221 TRAHSFER 221 calling Call 2717 YES HO Camped 221 CALLBACK Linebl TRAHSFER Lineggl 221 Line i transfer Someone is already using programming or the feature you are trying to use is not compatible with the configuration of the telephone or line You have tried to use a feature but you have not been given access to it i
184. he KIM also displays these icons Note that the KIM is only supported by version 5 and later software Active call The line is active and or you are connected A to this telephone 2 Ringing A call is coming into this line A Hold The call on this line is on Hold at this telephone Call forward The call on this line has been forwarded A Active button The feature assigned to this button is active Also used by Do Not Disturb Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 About your system telephones 207 T7316 Business Series Terminal The T7316 telephone has a two line display three display keys 16 memory keys with indicators eight memory keys without indicators and Handsfree capability The default button assignments for the T7316 Business Series Terminal BST depend on the template applied Refer to the Programming Record to identify the current button programming for each set or group of sets T7316 telephone Lower level programming but tons Upper level buttons Note the button numbering for the upper buttons of this set They are mapped to the button settings from the M7310 telephone which has two levels of programming on the upper buttons However since there is no second level of memory for the buttons on this set the button numbers are not consecutive These examples show defaults for a system with three digit internal numbers The defaults do not actually exis
185. he callers must have called you on a disconnect supervised line or the call is disconnected Sending Hookswitch or DTMF during a conference call Either system telephone engaged in a three way conference call over a Network CLID or DS trunk can issue a hookswitch or DTMF dialing request without leaving the conference To hear DTMF tones on both telephones during dial activate Long Tones FEATURE 808 To conference in someone through the trunk use Link FEATURE 71 Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Making external calls 257 Displays 3 Parties only You are trying to add a fourth party to your conference call or to join two conferences together Release one call from the conference before adding another or keep the two conferences separate Conf on hold You have put a conference call on hold Conference buss You have tried to make a conference call but your system is already handling its maximum of four conference calls Line li 21 You are on a conference with the two lines or TRANSFER telephones shown You can drop out of the conference and leave the other two parties connected Unsupervised Conference by pressing TRAHSFER or entering the Transfer feature code Press held line You have activated the Conference feature with one call active and another on hold Press the line of the call on hold to bring that person into the conference Using Class of service passwords Class
186. he DIA line feature is set to Prime extension The f busy feature is a line feature and DND is an extension feature The f busy feature is activated when a call cannot ring at any extension in the system The following table outlines the call scenarios when a DIA line is busy that is there are no available appearances of the DIA line DND on busy Yes Yes No No If busy Busy Tone Prime Busy Tone Prime The caller hears Ring back Ring back Ring back If Prime is Yes call goes callgoes Busy Tone callgoes to to Prime to Prime Prime If Prime is No Busy Tone Busy Tone Busy Tone Busy Tone Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Routing calls 247 Note DIA does not apply to ISDN lines that are programmed as manual answer lines Making a Priority call If the Administrator has allowed Priority call for your extension you can make an internal voice call when the system telephone you are calling is idle busy or has Do Not Disturb activated If you get a busy signal when you call someone in your office you can interrupt them Use this feature for urgent calls only Press 6 B or press PRIORITY Wait for a connection then speak Note A person who receives a Priority call while they are on another call has eight seconds to accept or reject the call If the person does not take the call the Priority call feature puts their active call on Exclusive Hold
187. he Registration password To register each Companion cordless handset with the Modular Plus system you must enter the Registration password on each cordless handset The default is 7 2 8 4 6 or RIADI You can and should set your own password to prevent unauthorised cordless handsets from registering on your system You can choose any combination of one to six digits You will find it easier to remember the password if the numbers correspond to a word Keep a record of the Registration password in a secure place This setting only appears if you have cordless credits available l EX ON p Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press 2 6 6 8 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi 7 2 7 5 68 7 SAPLUS The display shows nals Extns Press Termi Press Press Press Next Show Next four times The display shows Passwords The display shows COS rsuds until the display shows Red Fsud Press CHAHGE and enter the new password Press OK to accept the new password P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 176 Passwords Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Call services e Erasing a forgotten Call log password 178 Programming Call services 178 e 1st Display 178 e Auto called ID 179 P0607110 Issue 01 M
188. hich you forwarded your calls does not have the same exchange lines as your telephone the forwarded calls appear on intercom keys If a call is forwarded it does not ring but the line indicator flashes on your telephone You can still answer the call by pressing the key next to the flashing indicator If you are one of a group of people who regularly forward their calls to one another be aware that it is possible to set up loops where a call is forwarded from one telephone to another in a circle but it is not answered anywhere 1 Press J f 2 Enter the extension number of the telephone you want to forward your calls to The display shows Forward nnn To cancel press or press CAHCEL Note You can also set the system to forward your calls to another telephone when your telephone is busy or is not answered Note the differences between Line redirection and Call Forward Call Forward forwards all calls that arrive at your telephone to another telephone within the Modular Plus system Line redirection redirects only the lines you specify no matter which telephones they appear on to a telephone outside the Modular Plus system Line redirection takes precedence over Call Forward Overriding Call Forward If you telephone someone who has their calls forwarded to your extension your call rings at that person s telephone In this way you can still communicate with the forwarded extension P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus
189. hone ring Press the volume controls to adjust the volume up or down Programming M7000 T7000 memory keys The M700 T7000 telephones have four programmable keys Features programmed on these keys have the following restrictions do not have a display for information or instructions do not have line or extension keys External autodial Press o r 1 2 Press the key you want to programme 3 4 Press the wsd key Enter the telephone number P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 222 Customising your telephones Internal autodial DSS 1 Press J B 2 Press the key you want to programme 3 Enter the telephone number Feature access key 1 Press J amp B 2 Press the key you want to program 3 Press and the code you wish to programme Personal Speed Dial programming Press 4 1 2 Enter the speed dial code 3 Enter the telephone number 4 Press the wsdl key Ring Type programming 1 Press J 6 2 Press 1 2 3 or 4 to select the Ring type desired 3 Press the sdh key Tones Since the M7000 T7000 telephones do not have a display you will hear the following tones stuttered dialtone for Do Not Disturb and Call Forward single low frequency command input tone single high frequency confirmation tone Note The lamp shows a solid light if there is a message from a Direct Dial extension or a V
190. hows Contrast lewel 4 2 Press a number on the keypad for the contrast level you want or if you have a two line telephone press UF and DOWH to adjust the contrast 3 Press gt or OK to set the new contrast level Key Inquiry Ensure that the function of a key matches the label on the key by pressing 0 and then the key The key function displays on the telephone On the M7100N T7100 telephones Key Inquiry displays the extension number is followed by the function assigned to the single memory key To find out your extension number use the key Inquiry feature CJ 0 on an intercom key Displays agi Linegai The display shows the number and name of SHOW OK the line Press SHO to view the redirection status of the line 123456789012345 Press or press VIEW or 4 IEW t o view a WIEW OK number that is too long to fit on the display Press or k when you are done 21 lt SETHAME gt The display shows the directory number of HEST UIEL the telephone and the assigned name Press HEXT to see the first line assigned to ring at the intercom key Feature name The name of the feature assigned to a key SHOW OK is displayed when you press the key Press or SHOW for additional information Press a key Press the key you want to check Press EXIT or EXIT when you are finished Checking the function of a key 1 Press 0 2 Press the key you want to know about The display reads what has be
191. idual extensions must have access to a line pool be programmed to Allow Redirect Y under Terminals Extns Restrictions textans gt to allow external destination programming Note When setting DPNSS Diversion using certain digits and Feature codes cannot be used in the dialout number This is because the digits received from the network must map to a valid extension in the PBX and these digits will not They are listed in following table Invalid digits codes e ou When you use 4 all calls go to the destination you select regardless of how Forward on Busy and Forward no Answer are programmed You can also use Line Redirection to forward calls outside the system Line redirection takes precedence over Call Forward Cancelling Call Forward To cancel Call Forward press 4 P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 270 Forwarding calls External Call Forward You can set individual extensions to forward calls using Call Forward All Calls CFAC or you can set individual extensions to automatically Call Forward Busy CFB or Call Forward No Answer CFNA External Call Forward ECF allows you to forward the forwarding features to external destinations To allow ECF the individual extensions must have access to a line pool be programmed to Allow Redirect V under Trminals Ertns Restrictions Cextns J ISDN and Network Call Diversion
192. ieval processing and storage of files is possible for the home worker using ISDN lines to give high speed access to information held in the office Group 4 fax ISDN fax applications pride cost savings by increasing transmission speed and quality of resolution Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN 301 Remote LAN access ISDN provides an affordable and fast means for workers in remote sites at home or branch offices to access local area networks LANS Leased circuit back up Essential back up for leased KiloStream circuits can be provided using ISDN as reguired rather than duplicating costly permanent circuits LAN to LAN bridging LAN bridge routers allow flexible interconnection between LANs using ISDN with charges only incurred when information is actually transmitted Broadcasting Using ISDN and digital codecs broadcasters can convey music news and commentaries with absolute clarity Video surveillance Dial up access using videocodecs provides advanced surveillance on demand Accessing information services The fast call set up and high bandwidth of ISDN are ideal for accessing information services such as Internet and databases ISDN Supported services Modular Plus supports the following ISDN services basic incoming calls basic outgoing calls Direct Dial Inward Calling Line Identification Presentation Multi
193. iewed oJ RESUME View new items in the log H HEU When viewing an item View the next item in the log H HEXT Erase the item you are viewing ERASE View more information on this item Right side of MORE Trim digits from the beginning of the Left side of TRIM number you are viewing prior to dialling C J the number Go back to the previous item Placing a call to a number in the call log You may find it helpful to place calls from within your call log The number stored for each call may vary depending on the type of call For example if the call was placed from a Centrex or PBX system the first few numbers may need to be shortened before you can make the call If the number you want to call is long distance or if you want to use a line pool you may need to add numbers To place a call B Ne Display the log item for the call you want to place Display the associated telephone number Dial any extra digits required Press an exchange line or line pool key Lift the handset This is not necessary if Handsfree is programmed at your telephone The displayed number is dialled While viewing the log you can place a call to the number displayed in the log 1 If the number begins with digits that you do not need when calling from your location press the left side of the volume bar or TRIM once for every digit that you want to remove Add any digits required to route this number to an appropriate line fo
194. if the Prime line is in use Telephones connected to an Analogue Terminal Adaptor ATA cannot use Automatic dial Predial Allows you to enter a telephone number check it then change it before actually making the call The call is not dialled until you select a line or line pool or pick up the handset You can predial external and extension numbers You must however select the correct type of line external or internal for the type of number you have entered If all the lines on your telephone are busy you cannot enter a telephone number If your telephone starts ringing while you are predialling a number you can stop the ringing by turning on Do Not Disturb Ce This does not affect numbers you are entering Setting the dialling mode of your telephone 1 Press 2 Press or HEST to choose Automatic dial Predial or Standard dial 3 Press or OK to select the displayed dial mode Note Standard dial does not support dialling without lifting the handset of M7100N T7100 or M7000 T7000 telephones If you have one of these telephones use the Automatic dial or Predial modes for dialling without lifting the handset Note The dialling modes feature code cannot be programmed to a memory key Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Customising your telephones 219 Display contrast You can adjust the contrast on your telephone display to make it easier to read 1 Press 7 The display s
195. il the display shows ATA settings 10 Press Show _ The display shows ATA ans timeri 11 Press CHAHGE to choose 3 5 7 or 10 seconds 12 Press 48 to exit or to continue in programming Changing the dial mode of an ATA You must tell the system whether the device connected to the ATA sends out pulse or tone DTMF signals The default signal is tone l Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Password Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Extns 4 Press Show The display show Show extn 5 Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to programme 6 Press Show The display shows Line access 7 Press Next The display shows Carabilities 8 Press Show _ The display shows Fud no answer 9 Press Next until the display shows ATA settings 10 Press Show _ The display shows ATA ans timeri 11 Press Next The display shows ATA mode 12 Press CHANGE to choose Tone or Pulse 13 Press 48 to exit or to continue in programming P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 154 Settings for analogue eguipment Setting whether the ATA should receive system tones You must tell the system whether the device connected to the ATA should receive confirmation and error tones These tones inform a person of call pro
196. in the system Log all calls including those you answer applies to all lines capable of providing call information even if your extension is not assigned as an autologging extension for that line 1 Press a 2 Press or HEXT to change the options 3 Press or OE to select the display option Setting your Call log password You can set a password for access to your call log to keep your log private From then on you must enter this password to view your call log 1 Press 5 The displays shows Hew Fassurd 2 Enter your four digit password The display shows Fereat Hewi 3 Re enter your four digit password The display shows Password charged which confirms that your password has been assigned To enter Call log using your password 1 Press to enter Call log If you have programmed a password the display shows Passwordi 2 Enter your four digit password If you forget your Call log password it can be removed in programming See Changing your Call log password P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 290 Using display features Changing your Call log password 1 Press 5 The display shows ld rassurd 2 Enter your old password The display shows Hew Fassurdi 3 Enter your new four digit password The display shows Fereat Hewi 4 Re enter your password The display shows Password charged which confirms that your password has been changed Removing your Ca
197. ine pool and dial out digits It then adds the digits that the caller dialled minus the ones that are to be absorbed from the destination code In the following example a caller at extension 6625 in London wants to reach a colleague in Maidenhead Without the routing service the caller would have to select a line and dial 01628 784221 to reach extension 4221 in Maidenhead Because the system has an appropriate route and destination code the caller simply dials 4221 The system recognises 4 as a destination code It checks destination code 4 which instructs it to use DialOut 01628 78 and Line Pool A from Route 002 It is instructed not to absorb any digits from the destination code so it adds all the digits the caller dialed 4221 to the end of the dial out string and dials out the call Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Programming Services 163 Example of a simple Route London Maidenhead Extn 6625 Extn 4221 dialled digits 4221 Line pool A dialled digits 01628 784221 Routing service settings Routes Route 002 DialOut 01628 78 Use Pool A Dest codes DstCode 4 Normal 002 AbsorbLength O Specifying the type of line to be used Each route allows you to programme the line pool and thus the type of line to be used as the outgoing facility to reach a destination For example if ISDN lines have been placed in line pool B specifying pool B as the line pool to us
198. ing 110 Receive tones 111 Programming User preferences 113 Programming User preferences 114 Changing the key programming for an extension 114 Changing a Personal user speed dial code 115 Changing the Call log options 115 Changing the Dialling options 116 Changing the display language 117 Changing the display contrast 117 Changing the Ring type 118 Programming Hunt groups 119 P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide Hunt Groups 120 Adding or removing members from a group 121 Moving members of a group 122 Members line appearance 122 Assigning or unassigning lines to a group 123 Assigning a distinctive ring pattern to a Hunt Group 124 Setting the distribution mode 125 Setting the hunt delay 126 Programming options if all hunt group members are busy 126 Programming the queue timeout 127 Programming the overflow extension 128 Setting the name 128 Checking hunt group metrics 129 Programming feature settings 131 Background music 132 Onhold 132 Receiver volume 133 Camp timeout 133 Park timeout 134 Park Mode 135 Transfer callback 136 Network callback 137 Held line reminder and delay 137 Conference tone 138 Directed call pickup 139 Page tone 139 Page timeout 140 Calllog space 140 Alarm extension 141 Answer extension 142 Setting SWCA controls 143 CLID Match 144 Moving and copying 145 Extension relocation 146 Copying programming for telephones 147 Settings for analogue equipm
199. ing Again 11 19 DND 11 Call Fwd 19 DND 12 Line lt xx gt 20 Conf Trans 12 Pick Up 20 Conf Trans 13 Page 21 Last No 13 Page 21 Last No 14 Transfer 22 Voice Call 14 Transfer 22 Voice Call 15 Time Date 23 Intercom 15 Time Date 23 Intercom 16 Receive msd 24 Intercom 16 Receive msg 24 Intercom Central Answering Position CAP The T7316E can be used alone or you can expand feature and line button capacity by adding one or more Key Indicator Modules KIM Each KIM has 24 buttons with indicator displays T7316E with KIM Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 206 About your system telephones A KIM that is configured to support line and hunt group appearances is called an eKIM A T7316E supports a maximum of four eKIMs A KIM that is not configured in system programming does not support lines This type of module is called an OKIM A T7316E can support a maximum of nine OKIMs You need to add a system power supply SPS if you install five or more OKIMs on a T7316E The CAPN is usually the Prime extension and the Direct Dial telephone for the lines and telephones it serves The T7316E telephone displays a set of icons in place of flashing arrows when it is connected to a system with version 5 or newer software If you connect a T7316E telephone to a system that is running previous versions the standard line indicators display T
200. inging See Line assigning to an extension lines CAPN CAP lines 43 loop guarded or earth calling DIA 245 Listen on hold 241 listening in a group 237 locking an extension 94 log calls See Call Log log space allocation 140 Logit 290 long tones feature 296 Loop avoidance 305 loop guarded lines DIA calls 245 M Maintenance overview 194 map programming 21 Memory keys erasing 282 feature code 282 programming 282 Message waiting 305 Messages erasing 263 feature display 213 replying 262 viewing 261 P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide Index 350 moving telephones 146 music on hold background 132 M7100N telephone 211 M7208N telephone 210 M7310N telephone 209 M7324N telephone 208 N Network Call Diversion 270 Network Transfer Callback delay 137 Night service see Services Norstar feature codes 316 numbering plan 161 O Originating Line Identification 245 Originating Line Identification OLI and line pools 48 setting for an extension 47 outgoing calls SWCA keys 232 overlay programming 14 overriding Call Forward 271 P Page Timeout 76 140 Page Tone 139 Page zone setting up 106 Paging features 264 programming 107 remote 264 Park timeout programming 134 Parking a call 244 Passwords Administration 173 Basic 173 Call Log 289 erasing 178 Registration 175 187 SAPLUS 172 using 30 PBX template T7316 buttons 208 T7316E buttons 205 Personal Speed Dial feature 225
201. ink JJe Call pick up Group Link M7 Call Queuing Link HB8 b f Call Waiting Link HB8 lb f Camp on Link Jee Conference call Link JB Hold Call Exclusive Link JJe Hold Call Public Link JB Last Number Redial Link JB 6 Line Pool selection Link Hea Page General Link Jeo Intercom Link eeji External Link 6JB Intercom External Link 6 B Priority Call Link Jeje Privacy control Link BJB Reach through Recall Link mp Pause Link ZJB Timed release Link Je Restriction override Link J 6B Ring Again Link aa Saved Number Redial Link HEF P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 322 Feature guick reference Feature Send Message StarTalk or Norstar Voice Mail To activate To cancel Access mailbox Link e Leave a message Link e System Speed Dial Link 0 Tones Link B Link 1 8 0 Transfer Link 7 Trunk Answer from any Link Fe B telephone Voice Call Link 6 Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Appendix A Programming overviews P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 324 Appendix A Programming overviews Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Charts 325 Charts e Chart 1 System speed dial 326 e Chart 2 Naming extensions 326 e Chart 3 Naming lines 327 e Chart
202. inues on the other channel When the voice call ends the extra bandwidth is once again available to the data traffic Instructions for installing and programming the Digital Network Adapter are included in the Digital Network Adapter Guide Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Digital Private Network Signalling System Number 1 DPNSS 1 e DPNSS 1 services 304 e Three Party Service 305 e Diversion 306 e Redirection 307 e Executive Intrusion 308 e Call Offer 309 e Route Optimisation 310 e Message Waiting Indication 311 P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 304 Digital Private Network Signalling System Number 1 DPNSS 1 DPNSS 1 services DPNSS I is a networking protocol enhancement that extends the private networking capabilities of existing Norstar systems It is designed to offer greater centralised functionality for operators giving them access to Norstar features over multiple combined networks DPNSS 1 allows a Norstar local node to communicate with other PBXs over the network For example corporate offices separated geographically can be linked over DPNSS I to other Norstar nodes bypassing the restrictions of the PSTNs to which they may be connected This allows connected Norstar nodes to function like a private network with access to all features of your Norstar system DPNSS 1 features can be
203. ion P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 306 Digital Private Network Signalling System Number 1 DPNSS 1 Making a conference call To initiate or disconnect from a conference call on a Norstar system over DPNSS 1 proceed as in Making a conference call on page 253 Note Three Party Service is supported on M7100N T7100 and M7000 T7000 extensions but in a receive only fashion These extension types cannot initiate Three Party Service Diversion Diversion is a DPNSS 1 feature for Norstar that allows users to forward their calls to a third party on the DPNSS 1 network There are five variations on Diversion e Diversion Immediate diverts all calls to a programmed extension This function is set by the user e Diversion On Busy diverts all calls to a programmed extension when an extension is busy This is an administrator set function e Diversion On No Reply diverts calls that go unanswered after a specified amount of time This is an administrator set function e Bypass Call Diversion is a receive only feature If an incoming call is received with the diversion bypass service request any Call Forward features if active on the extension are overridden and the call keeps ringing on the extension Follow me Diversion Registration and Cancellation is a receive only feature If there is a reguest from the nominated extension to register follow me diversion Norstar will check the Originati
204. ircuits 241 to 254 TrunkType AC15 Line type PoolO Public Private to Pool A to N Dial mode Tone Pulse PrimeExtn 221 Auto privacy Y Amplified AC15 Y Vol Setting 1 2 3 Aux ringer N Recall at EXCH N Full AutoHold N Dstnct ring None 2 3 4 DPNSS lines TrunkType DPNSS Line type Pool N Pool A to Pool O Public Private to lt extn gt PrimeExtn 221 Dstnct ring None 2 3 4 CLID extn None Auto privacy Y Ans mode Manual Auto Aux ringer N Full AutoHold N Direct Inward Access lines 255 to 382 Line type PoolA PoolB to O Public Private to Received numbrs Private extn 1 to 7 digits Public extn 1 to 7 digits If busy BusyTone To prime PrimeExtn 221 CLID extn None I Aux ringer Y N Name Line I Call services VMsg centre 1 2 3 4 5 None Restrictions lines Restrn filters 00 99 Show filter Restrn flt 00 No restrictions Restrn flt 01 I Restrn 01 0 Deny 0 Override 001 0800 Restrn 02 1 Deny 1 No overrides Restrn flt 05 I Restrn 01 010 Deny 010 No overrides Restrn 02 1 Deny 1 No overrides I Restrn 03 00 Deny 00 No overrides Restrn fit 06 Restrn 01 lt ANY gt Deny lt ANY gt No overrides Line restrns Normal 03 Night 21 Evening 22 Lunch 23 Sched 4 00 Sched 5 00 Sched 6 00 Remote restrns Normal 04 Night 31 Evening 32 Lunch 33 Sched 4 00 Sched 5 00 Sched 6 00 Services Ringing
205. irected to an assistant The OLI programmed for the manager s extension is the Public Received number for the assistant s extension Thus a client viewing the CLID number on their telephone display sees the assistant s telephone number P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 48 Programming Terminals and Extensions If the OLI number is set to None then the CLID displayed at the called party s telephone is a Listed Extension number for your Modular Plus system If the programmed OLI number is outside the allowed range Modular Plus may insert a default number ATTENTION If your system is equipped with a mixture of digital line cards it is strongly recommended that you programme the extensions to use line pools when making outgoing calls If line pools are not properly configured an extension may use a line with a network range that does not include the extension s OLI causing the network to present an incorrect CLID to the called party 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fassword I 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Term inals amp extrs 4 Press Show The display shows Show extn 5 Enter the extension number of the telephone you want to programme The display shows nnn innr 6 Press twice The display shows Line assignm
206. irst be programmed for use As the Administrator you can programme Full and Automatic Handsfree assign Pickup Groups to allow colleagues to easily answer calls ringing at a telephone other than their own assign page zones so that colleagues can page within their groups without disturbing the whole office programme an auxiliary ringer loud bell that alerts you when there are incoming calls to an extension assign a Direct Dial extension so your colleagues can reach an attendant by dialling just one digit set Call Forward so that all calls are answered when telephones are busy or unanswered e programme Do Not Disturb on busy activate Redirect ring assign a Hotline telephone to call one number automatically allow Priority call See Chart 9 Extension capabilities 1 on page 332 in Appendix A for a programming overview Setting Call Forward no answer When you set the system up to forward calls that are not answered at a particular telephone you must define the extension that the calls are sent to and the number of times that an incoming call rings before the call is forwarded You can choose 2 3 4 6 and 10 rings The default is 4 rings Note If the extension that you are forwarding calls to does not have a free intercom key or has Do Not Disturb or Do Not Disturb on busy activated the incoming call continues to visually alert at your telephone and the caller continues to hear ringback If
207. is lifted If the Sales department is in a meeting and they forward their lines to your extension the telephone display shows Sales for any incoming calls on their lines See Chart 3 Naming lines on page 327 in Appendix A for a programming overview 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terninals amp Extrs Press Next The display shows Lines Press Show _ The display shows Show lines Enter the line number The display shows the current name Press Show _ The display shows Hame Press HAHGE Oo pE py a Enter the characters of the name using the keypad or press to restore the default name 10 Press to store the name 11 Press 48 to exit or to continue in programming P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 72 Naming extensions and lines Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Changing the time and date e Changing the time and date 74 e Changing the time 74 e Changing the date 75 e Changing the time and date using the Basic password 75 e Changing the time by an hour 76 Automatic Time amp Date 76 P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 74 Changing the time and date C
208. isplay cntrst F Next Sched Sched 6 F Next Ring type Maintenance Routing service Show Rout Restrn filters Next Next LD Beastie Show Show filter x Raid Sched Nigit FH Next Extn restrns p ow Sched Nig j Common settings k Show Filters Usage Metrics Fk Next Sched Evening Next Sched Lunch FN PAR ings E Show k Next Allow last no Those F Next Sched Sched 4 A nos lt Next Sched Sched 5 continued on 3 F Next Allow recall next page Fk Next Control extns F Next Sched Sched 6 Net Alowr drec x w redi Fk Next Schedule names F Next Line exin rstrn Fk Next Schedule times M w Show li Auto call info k Show Show line Note F Next 1stDisplay The k symbol means Press For example Fk Next Auto Called ID Press Show Press Next or Press Heading Next Log sp ce x P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 22 Introduction
209. istration password 187 e Turning on Master Registration 188 e Checking if an extension is available for registration 189 e De registering an extension number for a cordless handset 190 e Turning off Master Registration 191 e What to tell your colleagues 191 P0607110 Issue O1 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 186 Adding cordless capability Cordless Capabilities Cordless capability allows you to make and receive calls at any location within the workplace Calls can ring at your desk or calls can be directed to your cordless handset To enable cordless capability on your Modular Plus system you must enter Software Keys See Software Keys on page 59 for more information Your cordless handset can access many Modular Plus business features such as Call Forward and Call Transfer Cordless capability on your Modular Plus system consists of four components Norstar software Norstar software manages the telephone traffic between Basestations and cordless handsets Basestations are connected to the CCU in the same way as are Norstar BST telephones Cordless handsets are registered on the system and do not take up any ports on the system Basestations Basestations are positioned throughout the coverage area to send and receive calls between the cordless handsets and the CCU Each Basestation contains two radio transceivers and can handle two cordless handset calls
210. it code Absorb length Select the portion of the destination code that is always absorbed by the system and not used in the dialling sequence Begin with Hormal step eleven of the previous procedure 1 2 Press Show _ The display shows AbsorbLenath 3 Press CHAHGE 4 Select the number of digits to be absorbed 0 All or any number up to the length of the destination code 5 Press to exit or to programme the next schedule If a telephone number does not match any of the programmed destination codes the user must first decide which line to select and then dial the number To make this task simple and to ensure that all long distance calls are being routed consistently all area codes in the United Kingdom numbering plan should be programmed as destination codes For example a destination code for Maidenhead might look like this Destination code 01628 Normal route 003 Absorb length 0 Route 003 DialOut No number Use Pool C A caller wishing to dial Maidenhead might dial 01628 237625 The system would recognise 01628 as a destination code It would select Pool C absorb no digits add no DialOut digits and dial the remaining digits to complete the call Routing service modifications Changes to routes should only be made during least busy call times or on an idle system Plan to programme routes when user activity is at a minimum P0607110 Issue O1 Modular Plus Sy
211. l the display shows Page tone 9 Press CHAHGE to choose Y Yes or N No 10 Press 48 to exit or to continue in programming P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 140 Programming feature settings Page timeout The paging feature is automatically disconnected after a specified length of time See Paging on page 264 for information about using the Paging feature 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Exths 4 Press Next until the display shows System ergrming 5 Press Show _ The display shows Hunt araurs 6 Press Next J until the display shows Featr settings 7 Press Show The display shows Back3rnd music 8 Press Next until the display shows Page timeout 9 Press CHAHGE to choose 15 30 60 120 180 300 600 2700 seconds 10 Press 48 to exit or to continue in programming Call log space Call log space customises how log space is allocated to telephones in the system Resetting all logs allows you to re allocate the Call log space egually to all telephones in your system Use this heading only if you want to allocate an equal amount of log space to all the telephones in your system There are 600 call log spaces available in the system Th
212. lace the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Extns 4 Press Next _ until the display shows Serwices 5 Press Show The display shows Ringing service 6 Press Next J until the display shows Common settings 7 Press Show The display shows Control extn 8 Press Show The display shows For lines 9 Press Next The display shows For extn 10 Press Show _ The display shows Show extin 11 Enter the extension number The display shows the extension number followed by the current control extension 12 Press CHAHGE and enter the extension number you want to assign as the control extension for this extension 13 Press 48 to exit or to continue in programming P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 170 Programming Services Changing the name of a schedule l Ss a A 10 11 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press 2 6 6 6 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi Press 7 2 7 6 6 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Extns Press Next until the display shows Services Press Show _ The display shows Ringing service Press Next until the display shows Common settings
213. lephone keypad Entering programming using the Basic password The Basic password allows someone to do day to day maintenance of individual telephones without allowing access to sensitive programming The default Basic password is 2 2 7 4 2 which spells BASIC on the telephone keypad You do not enter Basic programming using 2 6 6 B 4 4 CONFIG Instead you enter the Feature code that you want to programme followed by 2 2 7 4 2 BASIC For example 1 Press followed by the code 2 Enter 2 R 7 4 2 BASIC 3 Follow the instructions on the display and make your selections using the display keys P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 32 System programming introduction The following feature codes can be accessed using the Basic password USER User preferences settings allow you to programme telephone model key assignment User speed dial Call log options Dialling options Language Display contrast and Ring type 6 B TIME Time and Date settings allow you to change any of the settings for hour minutes seconds year month and day Programmable settings and features Modular Plus has several features that ensure that calls do not go unanswered or do not get lost For example extensions can be programmed to provide back up answering for other extensions or lines You can also create an attendant position to provide a
214. line display three display keys 10 memory keys with indicators 12 dual memory keys without indicators and Handsfree capability M7310N memory key assignments key with indicators Square Hybrid PBX Line 1 Line 1 Line Pool Line 2 Line Pool Conf tran Call Fwd Call Fwd Pick Up Pick Up Spd Dial Spd Dial Spd Dial DND DND DND Last No Last No Last No Page Page Page Intercom Intercom Intercom Intercom Intercom Intercom P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 210 About your system telephones M7310N key assignments for dual memory keys all templates Extn 233 Blank Extn 221 Extn 227 Extn 234 Blank Extn 222 Extn 228 Extn 235 Blank Extn 223 Extn 229 Extn 236 Blank Extn 224 Extn 230 Blank Blank Extn 225 Extn 231 Blank Blank Extn 226 Extn 232 The defaults shown may not actually occur onany telephone as no telephone has an autodial key for itself The extension number for each telephone appears as a blank key on that telephone M7208N T7208 telephones These telephones have a single line display eight memory keys with indicators and handsfree capability M7208N M7208N memory key assignments
215. ll Forward no answer on page 100 P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 34 System programming introduction Hunt groups Establish hunt groups in your system to allow external and internal callers to reach a group of extensions by calling a single directory number The hunt groups feature ensures calls are easily routed to the appropriate extension You can programme the members for a group member position within a group how calls are distributed how long is spent looking for available agents and what happens if all agents are busy For example your company has five sales people available to field calls from clients Bob is your most experienced salesperson and you would like him to receive incoming calls first You would set up a hunt group with these five extensions as members Programme Bob s extension as the first member in the group set the distribution mode to sequential so Bob receives incoming calls first and name this group SALES See Programming Hunt groups on page 119 Pickup group Assign extensions to one of nine Pickup groups for maximum call coverage This ensures that extensions in a group can answer calls for any other extension in that group For example Mr Forbes and Ms Smith both belong to Pickup group 3 When Mr Forbes is away from his extension Ms Smith presses on her own extension to answer Mr Forbes s calls A hunt group call ringing at an extension th
216. ll log password When you remove your Call log password anyone can access your call log 1 Press 5 The display shows ld rassurd 2 Enter your old password The display shows Hew Fassurdi 3 Press or OE The display shows Ho Fswd assigned which confirms that your password has been deleted Logging an incoming call Logit If your calls are not automatically logged you can manually log call information when you are connected to an external call Storing information for your current call can be helpful in many situations For example you may want to record a caller s name and number without using paper and pencil record only calls that you choose as opposed to using Call log automatically e quickly record caller information before a caller hangs up To log an external call manually Press B Note Ifyou programme the Call log feature code to a memory key with an indicator the indicator lights when there are new items in the log Viewing your Call log New items are shown with the first character underlined Press Ce 8 f1 2 Use either the display keys or your keypad to navigate through the log Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Using display features 291 Call log key pad and display key actions Action Key Display key On entering the log View log items you have viewed before OLD View the last item you v
217. ll that is ringing at any telephone in your Pickup Group Press 5 Note Group Pickup cannot be used to retrieve a camped call If there is more than one incoming call at a telephone in a Pickup Group a call ringing on an exchange line is answered first followed by calls on the Prime line and finally calls on internal lines Displays Already joined You are already connected to the telephone that made the call you are trying to pick up This can happen if you are on a call to a colleague your colleague dials the number of a telephone in your Pickup Group and you attempt to pick up that call Pickur denied There is no call that you can pick up or the call that was ringing has already been answered You have tried to pick up a call on someone else s private line Fickur Enter the extension number of the telephone that is ringing You may use an internal autodial key to do this If you decide not to answer a ringing call after you have activated Directed Pickup press Line Answer The Line Answer feature allows you to answer a ringing call anywhere in the system from any telephone in the system The line you are answering does not have to appear or ring at the telephone you are using Line Answer works only with calls that are ringing on lines for which a Ringing service schedule is active and if Line Answer is enabled Answering a call using Line Answer Press 2 J 0 0 P0607110 Issue 01 Mod
218. lling sequence If your Modular Plus system is connected to a host system a private branch exchange PBX for example you can use a Recall signal to access special features such as PBX Call Forward and PBX Transfer While you are on a call or programming an autodial key press IAW Run Stop inserts a break point into an autodial or speed dial number This may be necessary when you are connecting to a PBX or similar host system For example you may call a company with an automated receptionist that instructs you to dial the extension number you need You can programme the company number a Run Stop then the extension number on one external autodial key Press the autodial key once to dial the company number When you hear the automated receptionist press the autodial key again to dial the extension number The Run Stop symbol E uses one of the 24 spaces in an autodial or speed dial sequence You can include up to three Run Stop commands in a dialling string The system ignores a fourth Run Stop and any digits or commands that follow it in a programmed dialling sequence Press RJ while programming a dialling sequence P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 298 Special dialling features Wait for Dial Tone Wait for Dial Tone causes a seguence of numbers to pause until dial tone is present on the line before continuing to dial This is useful if you must dial a remote system and then wait for
219. lus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Programming Terminals and Extensions 45 6 Press twice The display shows Line assignment 7 Press until the display shows Prime linei 8 Press CHAHGE to select the setting None Pool A Pool N Pool O or Intcm intercom Only assigned lines and line pools appear 9 Press to exit or to continue in programming An assigned Prime line is not associated with the assignment of a Prime telephone An exchange line must be assigned to the telephone in Line assignment before it can be assigned as the Prime line to the telephone A line pool must be assigned to the telephone in line pool access before a line pool can be assigned as the Prime line to the telephone By assigning a line pool as a Prime line a telephone can be made to search automatically for an idle line in a pool Note If you set Prime line to Intcm intercom you can still access any line pools you have assigned to the telephone by entering a line pool access code When you enter the line pool access code the system searches for an idle line in that pool When all the lines in the pool are busy the display shows Ho free lines The system does not search from one pool to another Assigning intercom keys to an extension This setting assigns the number of intercom keys to a telephone Intercom keys can provide a telephone with access to internal lines and line pools See Using Autodial on pag
220. ly When you are finished press or OK This message appears only after you select a line or line pool Enter a three digit number between 256 and 279 to select the code for programming There is no number stored on the speed dial code you have dialled On the T7100 M7100N and T7208 M7208N telephones if you want to programme a line or line pool selection for this speed dial number select the line or line pool Otherwise enter the telephone number exactly as you would if you were dialling it normally When you are finished press If you want to programme a line or line pool selection for this speed dial number select the line or line pool Otherwise enter the telephone number you wish to programme exactly as you would if you were dialling it normally When you are finished press Ok There is no line associated with the speed dial number you are trying to use Select a free exchange line or line pool and enter the speed dial feature code again The system cannot dial the number stored Reprogram the number Enter a three digit number between 001 and 279 to select the code for dialling All lines are busy Press LATER then YES to have the system notify you when a line is free To make a call using a personal or system Speed Dial code 1 Press Ce 0 2 Enter the appropriate three digit Speed Dial code 001 279 Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Answering calls e Answe
221. n programming You have taken more than 15 seconds to press a button in response to a display You have entered a feature code that is used by an application programme that your system does not have You have entered an invalid feature code You have tried to use a feature that is not available in the present set up of your Modular Plus system You cannot use the feature you have chosen because your telephone is locked See Locking an extension on page 86 Press or press WIEW or JIEW to view a number that is too long to fit on the display Press or k when you are finished This indicates a long distance call May be available with Call Display services Either you are receiving an internal call from telephone 239 forwarded by telephone 221 or you have an answer button for telephone 221 and an internal call from 239 is ringing on 221 You are connected to an internal call Press TRANSFER to transfer the call You are receiving a call from telephone 221 You have received a Ring Again offer for a call to an internal telephone Press the flashing internal line button or YES to call the number again On the T7100 M7100N or T7000 M7000 telephones just lift the receiver Otherwise press H or wait 30 seconds for the Ring Again offer to expire The person to whom you camped the call did not answer it The call has come back to you Press the line button or CALLBACE to reconnect to the call Y
222. n put on hold Note Insystems networked with private circuits it is a good idea to have callers hear tones on all systems on the private network Otherwise callers who are transferred across the private network may hear a confusing variety of music tones and silence 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi 3 Press Terri Press Press Press Press COS OY En Oe Press 7 7 6 7 SAPLUS The display shows nals amp Extrs Next until the display shows System Frarmina Show The display shows Hunt 3rours Next until the display shows Featr settings Show _ The display shows Back9rnd musics Next _ until the display shows On hold Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Programming feature settings 133 Receiver volume Camp timeout 9 Press CHAHGE to choose Tones Music or Silence 10 Press 48 to exit or to continue in programming Receiver volume allows you to specify whether the volume level of a receiver or headset returns to the system default level when a call is ended or put on hold or whether it remains at the level set at the individual telephone 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi
223. n the lines Number of appearances This setting allows you to assign the number of appearances of a DIA line lines 255 to 382 allowed on an extension In order to programme the number of appearances the line assignment value cannot be Unassigned The default appearance setting is 1 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fassuord I 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Term inals amp extrs 4 Press Show The display shows Show estns 5 Enter the extension number of the telephone you want to programme The display shows nnn innr 6 Press three times The display shows Show lines 7 Enter the line number The display shows the line number and its assignment 8 Press until the display shows Arrearances 1 This prompt does not appear if the line is unassigned 9 Press CHAHGE and enter a numeric value from 1 to 255 10 Press to exit or to continue programming P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 44 Programming Terminals and Extensions Assigning line pool access Line pools allow the system to share lines among a number of telephones reducing line costs and the number of button appearances on the telephones in the system This setting allows a telephone to access one or more of the line pools available A B to O When you chan
224. n the system automatically answers an incoming call on auto answer ISDN BRA lines it matches these digits to a Received number and routes the call to the appropriate DIA line The installer programs the Received number length A Received number cannot be the same as another Received number or the Auto number It also cannot start with the same first digit as any line pool code Busy tone for a Direct Inward Access line You can program a DIA line to return busy tone or route a call to the Prime extension for the line if all extensions are busy When f busy is set to Busy Tone the caller receives a busy tone When Zf busy is set To Prime the call is routed to the Prime extension If all intercom keys on the Prime extension are busy the caller receives busy tone Busy tone with Do Not Disturb on Busy When Do Not Disturb on Busy DND is turned on for an extension internal and network callers hear a busy tone External callers are transferred to the Prime extension If there are no available appearances of the DIA line and the DND on busy feature is set to Yes for one of these extensions the second caller hears ring back and the call is routed to the Prime extension for the line If there are no available appearances of the DIA line and the DND on busy feature is set to No on all extensions with an appearance of the DIA line the caller hears busy tone When f busy is set to Busy Tone the call is routed to the Prime extension if t
225. nation codes 165 ATA See Analogue Terminal Adapter auto associate 143 auto hold SWCA keys 231 Autobumping feature 293 Autodial external number 279 internal number 279 using intercom key 279 Automatic Telephone Relocation 146 Automatic Time amp Date 76 auxiliary ringer programming 110 Background Music programming 132 using 224 Barring calls customising 83 default filters 82 using restriction filters 82 Basestation description 186 Basic password 173 British Telecommunications address 39 Business Series Terminals T7316E default buttons 204 button defaults T7316 Business Series Terminal 207 P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 345 Index 346 T7316E Business Series Terminal 204 buttons T7316E defaults 204 C Call Camping feature 248 Call capture settings that enhance 32 38 38 call charge 293 Call duration time 286 Call Forward canceling 269 Call Forward All Calls 36 Call Forward All Calls ISDN 319 Call Forward No Answer Hunt groups 101 setting up 100 Call Forward on Busy Hunt groups 102 setting up 102 Call holding 240 Call Information symbols 288 viewing 287 Call Log Autobumping 293 erasing password 178 feature 288 Logit 290 password 289 programming 292 selecting options 115 setting extension 289 space 140 viewing 290 Call Offer 305 309 Call Park 244 Hunt group calls 244 Call Pickup directed 234 group 235 programming directed 139 Call queuing 229 Call R
226. ncellation that is expected from the particular message centre Viewing your messages If you have messages your display will read Message for you There are three ways you can retrieve or call back the message centre Pressing MSG M7324N M7310N T7316 and T7316E extensions only Dialling the 6 5 code for Msg reply Pressing a key that is programmed for Msg reply Your display will show the message number and name along with one or more of HEXT CALL and CLEAR Note WHET appears when there is more than one message CALL appears when the number for that particular message centre has been programmed into the system Scrolling through messages You can use HEYT or the key to receive the following message in the list HET is displayed only if there is more than one message Use the key to display the previous message in the list Replying to messages If CALL appears on the display you can use it to connect to the messaging centre in order to reply Note A password may be required for logging on to the voice mail system This is provided by the message centre since Norstar does not provide any password for this feature CALL is displayed only if the number for that particular message has been programmed into the system Removing messages You erase messages by pressing CLEAR or the HOLD key on your extension This clearing takes place locally the status of the message remains the sam
227. nd if necessary will have full support from Nortel Networks Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Introduction 13 You must be the administrator If the installer has given this guide to you you are most likely the system administrator As an administrator your role is to help your colleagues learn to use their Norstar Business Series Terminal BST extensions change Norstar programming to customise the system for your office or to keep up with changes in your office environment or personnel e call for help or service when necessary The System Administration Guide contains all the information you need to become proficient at using and programming the Modular Plus system Here s what you need to start programming By following instructions on the telephone display and by pressing a few keys you can change the Modular Plus system to suit the specific needs of your office Before you begin programming make sure you have one of the following telephones with overlay T7316E telephone and the T7316 T7316E programming overlay a T T7316E Ar He programming L buttons Business Oooo oO000 e iaa Series Ce Terminal Heading Show T731 6 p Back Next programming E buttons Programming overlay i sers sise I OADFAB66606 P0607110 Issu
228. nd date for the Modular Plus system 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fassword 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Extns 4 Press Next until the display shows System ergrming 5 Press Show _ The display shows Hunt 9raurs 6 Press Next until the display shows Featr settings 7 Press Show The display shows Backarmd musici 8 Press Next until the display shows AutoTimefDate 9 Press HAHGE to choose or H 10 Press 48 to exit or to continue programming Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Assigning a Direct Dial extension Programming Direct Dial 78 Programming an internal Direct Dial extension 78 Programming an external Direct Dial extension 79 P0607110 Issue O1 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 78 Assigning a Direct Dial extension Programming Direct Dial Direct Dial allows you to dial a designated telephone in your Modular Plus system or private network with a single digit The Direct Dial digit is the digit you dial to reach an attendant in your office You can have up to five Direct Dial extensions in your Modular Plus system A person whose telephone is a Direct Dial extension is usually a receptionist for your entire office or for a particular depar
229. ne See Allowing an extension to use Redirect ring on page 110 Trunk answer This feature is active by default for all Services This means that during non business or non busy times any extension can answer calls ringing at any other extension It does not matter which lines appear on the extensions It only matters that the line itself has been placed in a Service mode using its Control extension For example during the lunch break between 11 30 a m and 1 00 p m lines 1 2 and 3 are put in Lunch mode Trunk answer is active so whenever any extension rings Mr Cassidy who acts as a temporary attendant can answer from his extension See Using alternate or scheduled services on page 158 Answer extension If your telephone has an Answer key for someone else s extension you can answer that person s calls on your telephone For example Mr Cassidy s telephone has an Answer key for Miss Vale When Miss Vale s telephone rings Mr Cassidy can answer it on his telephone by pressing the Answer key assigned with Miss Vale s extension Simply press the Answer key when you hear the other person s telephone ringing See Answer extension on page 142 P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 36 System programming introduction Call Forward all calls If you know you are going to be away from your extension for a while forward your calls to another extension Otherwis
230. ne Use line Pool code Use routing tabl Display digits Y characters Bypass restr n N Passwords COS pswds Show pswd _ 00 99 COS pswd 00 Pswd 00 None User flt None 00 to 99 Line flt None 00 to 99 Remote pkg None 00 to 15 Call log pswds Show extn _ 221 221 Log pswd None Progrming pswds Installer 266344 CONFIG SysAdmin 727587 I SAPLUS Sys admin 23646 ADMIN Basic 22742 BASIC Reg pswd 72346 RADIO Hospitality Desk pswd 4677 HOSP Cond None if Display digits N Name Sys Spd Dial XXX lt name gt max 16 Time amp Date Hour 01 Minutes 00 I Year 01 Month 01 Day 01 System prgrming Hunt groups Show group _ HGn extension Members extns M001 extension Appr only Appr amp Ring Ring only Line assignment Show line Lnnn Unassigned Assigned Mode Seguential Cyclic Broadcast Hunt delay 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 If busy BusyTone Overflow Queue Q Timeout 15 30 45 60 120 180 Overflow _ extension Name HGn _ 7 characters Dsinct ring None 2 3 4 Aux ringer N Change extns Old extn _ Max 7 digits New extn _ Max 7 digits Featr settings Backgrnd music N On hold Tones Music Silence Receiver volume Use sys volume Use extn volume Camp timeout 30 45 60 90 120 150 180 Park timeout 30 45 60 90 120 150 180 300 600 Park Mode Lowest Cycle Trnsfr callbk Y Trnsfr callbk 3 4 5 6 12
231. nes 69 P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide Naming extensions 70 Naming lines 71 Changing the time and date 73 Changing the time and date 74 Changing the time 74 Changing the date 75 Changing the time and date using the Basic password 75 Changing the time by anhour 76 Automatic Time amp Date 76 Assigning a Direct Dial extension 77 Programming Direct Dial 78 Programming an internal Direct Dial extension 78 Programming an external Direct Dial extension 79 Barring calls and privileges Restrictions 81 Using restriction filters to bar calls 82 Assigning filters to a telephone Extn restrns 85 Assigning filters to a line Line restrns 86 Assigning filters to a specific line or extension 87 Class of service passwords 88 Assigning a remote access filter 91 Changing an existing COS password 92 Locking an extension 94 Preventing Last Number Redial 95 Preventing Saved Number Redial 95 Preventing Recall 96 Preventing Redirect 97 Programming capabilities 99 Programming an extension 100 Setting Call Forward no answer 100 Setting Call Forward on busy 102 Programming Do Not Disturb on busy 102 Programming Handsfree 104 Programming Handsfree answerback 105 Assigning a Pickup group 105 Assigning a page zone 106 Allowing paging 107 Assigning telephones to the Direct Dial extension 107 Allowing Priority call 108 Assigning a Hotline 109 Auxiliary ringer 110 Allowing an extension to use Redirect r
232. ng Press Show _ The display shows Hunt 3raurs Press Show _ The display shows Shaw aroari Enter the hunt group number you want to programme 01 30 The display will show the hunt group number followed by the hunt group extension number e g HGH1 514 Press The display shows Member extns Press The display shows the members for that group Press ADD to add a member or press REMOWE to remove a member from the group To program the extension appearance press Show The display shows AFrr Rirg Press CHAHGE to select AFFr only AFPr amp Ring or Eina only Press to exit or to continue programming P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 122 Programming Hunt groups Moving members of a group Member order within a hunt group is important The member order determines how the system routes calls through a hunt group l ee o pr E 10 11 12 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fassword I Press 7 2 7 5 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Extrs Press Next until the display shows System Frarming Press Show The display shows Hunt Srours Press Show _ The display shows Shaw Srour Enter the hunt group number you want to programme 01 30 Press The display shows Member extns Press The displ
233. ng Line Identifier OLI for the incoming request If it matches with the programmed Diversion Immediate destination it will make a virtual call for the validation to the new destination and overwrite the existing Diversion Immediate destination by the new destination If there is a request for the nominated extension to cancel the Diversion Immediate programmed Norstar will check the OLI for the incoming request If it matches with the programmed Diversion Immediate destination Diversion is cancelled Note There is no cancellation of Diversion on Busy or Diversion on No Reply from the nominated extensions These are programmable only by the System Administrator or the Installer and not by the user as in Diversion Immediate If multiple extensions are programmed to take a call the first extension to respond will act and all other responses are ignored Therefore if the first extension to respond has Diversion set this feature will be invoked Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Digital Private Network Signalling System Number 1 DPNSS 1 307 Setting Diversion You set Diversion for DPNSS in the same way as Call Forward see Programming an extension on page 100 You will need to enter the DPNSS 1 network number when prompted with Show extr You may also need to include the DPNSS I routing number norstar must have a private access code programmed that maps to a valid destination code or line pool
234. ng machines that are either on your premises or at another location When you want to connect extensions at some other location to your system specify Off site 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Passard Press 7 2 Z 6 J 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Extns Press Show _ The display show Show extn Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to programme The display shows nnn innr 5 6 Press 7 Press 8 Press 9 Press 10 Press 11 Press Show f Next Show Next Show Next The display shows Line access The display shows Carabilities The display shows Fwd no answer until the display shows ATA settings The display shows ATA ans timer until the display shows ATA uses 12 Press CHANGE to choose On site or Off site 13 Press 48 to exit or to continue in programming P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 156 Settings for analogue eguipment Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Programming Services e Using alternate or scheduled services 158 e Turning Services on or off 158 e Designating alternate routes for calls 161 e Programming routes 164 Programming destination codes 165 e Turning a manual service on or off
235. nnot be changed These keys do not appear on the telephone Assigning an Answer key to an extension Calls for other Norstar BST extensions can appear and be answered at the telephone being programmed The extension numbers of the other telephones are referred to as Answer extension numbers You can assign up to eight Answer extension numbers to the telephone being programmed See Answer keys on page 236 for information about using Answer keys 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordg I 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Extrs 4 Press Show _ The display shows Show extn 5 Enter the extension number of the telephone you want to programme The display shows rninn innr 6 Press twice The display shows Line assignment Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Programming Terminals and Extensions 47 7 Press until the display shows Answer extns 8 Press Show _ The display shows Show extrit 9 Enter the extension number 10 Press CHAHGE to change the setting for the Answer extension number Appr amp Ring Appr only or Unassigned 11 To assign additional Answer extension numbers press Heading Show then enter the next Answer extension number 12 Press SCAH to view the Answer extension numbers assign
236. nswering for a group of extensions You can forward calls that are unanswered pick up calls for other extensions redirect selected lines to telephones inside or outside your business and have calls answered from any extension during non business or off peak hours Many call capture features are pre configured with your Modular Plus system Others however must be programmed in order to take full advantage of their flexibility The following programming settings are used to enhance answering and handling calls Do Not Disturb DND on Busy Answer extension Forward on Busy Call Forward all calls Forward No Answer Call Pickup Directed Hunt groups Call Pickup group Pickup Group Call Queuing Prime extension Do Not Disturb Prime line Line redirection Redirect Ring Ring again Trunk Answer Transfer SWCA keys Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 System programming introduction 33 Do Not Disturb DND on Busy When this setting is turned on you do not hear any ringing if a second call arrives while you are talking on the telephone If you want to know when a second call arrives turn this setting off For example Mr Forbes dislikes having his telephone ring when heisonacall Therefore he uses the DND on Busy feature so that additional calls are diverted to the Prime extension until he has finished his current call If your telephone is a Prime extension for any
237. nt connections between one exchange line and another To establish a conference call with two other system telephones a telephone must have two assigned intercom keys The keys appear starting at the lowest right hand position or one key above that if the Handsfree feature is assigned to the telephone The M7100N T7100 or M7000 T7000 telephones do not have keys that can be used to assign intercom keys conference Make or answer the call with the first party Place that call on hold Make the call to the second party Press B Take the held call off hold This is automatic on the M7100N T7100 and M7000 T7000 telephones AB P PE P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 254 Making external calls Allowing a colleague to join your conference Normally your calls are private You can turn Privacy off for a call allowing another person in your office with the same line to press the line key and join in a conference or a two way call 1 While on a call press BJ 2 Tell the other person to press the line key and join your conversation Only two system telephones in addition to the external caller can take part in this kind of conference Disconnecting one person from the conference You can disconnect one party from a conference and continue talking to the other M7208N T7208 M7310N T7316 T7316E or M7324N telephones 1 Press the line key of the call that you want to disconnect Th
238. nue in programming Held line reminder and delay A reminder tone and display message occur at a Norstar telephone or Business Series Terminal when a call has been placed on hold for a certain period of time The display continues to show the name of the held line until the call is dealt with In the case of multiple calls on hold the display shows the name of the line that has been held the longest Once that call has been dealt with the display shows the number of the next longest held call You can switch Held line reminder on or off and set the time before the reminder takes effect The Held line reminder emits a double periodic tone This tone distinguishes the feature from the Call Waiting tone which uses a single periodic tone See Holding on page 240 for information on this feature P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 138 Programming feature settings 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Exths 4 Press Next until the display shows System er grming 5 Press Show _ The display shows Hunt araurs 6 Press Next until the display shows Featr settings 7 Press Show The display shows Back3rnd music 8 Press Next until the display shows Held reminder 9 Press C
239. o Allow redirect P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 332 Charts Chart 9 Extension capabilities 1 Terminals Extns SHOW Show extends Enter extension number SHOW Line access i HEXT Carabilities SHOW Fwd no answer Press to see the setting f HEXT Press CHAHGE to enter an extension number Forward delau If Fwd no answer is set to an extension HEAD IHG Fud ho answer HEAT Press CHANGE to select 2 3 4 6 or 18 rings Fud on buss Press to see the setting HEXT i Press CHAHGE to enter an extension number Press CHANGE to choose between Yes and H No Modular Plus System Administration Guide Charts 333 Chart 10 Extension capabilities 2 Terminals Extns SHOW A Show extn Enter extension number SHOW Line access HEXT Carabilities SHOW Fud no answer i HEST 3 times Handsfree Press CHAHGE to select Hone Auto or Std t HEXT Press CHAHGE to choose between Yes and H No HET Press CHANGE to select Hone 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 or 9 HEST Press CHAHGE to select Hone 1 2 3 4 5 or 6 HEST Paging i Press CHANGE to choose between Yes and H No P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 334 Charts Chart 11 Extension capabilities 3 Terminals Extns SHOW Show extn i Enter extension number SHOW Line acces
240. o has both a desk telephone and a cordless handset will be able to use the desk telephone to answer calls ringing at the handset if the Installer has programmed an Answer key on the desk telephone 4 Where a call goes if the handset loses its radio connection If a person using a cordless handset moves out of the coverage area or the handset s batteries fail the radio connection may be lost Explain to people that a call will be transferred to the Prime extension if a cordless handset loses its radio connection Tell them who is staffing the Prime extension 5 How to switch from Pulse Dial mode to Tone mode during a call If your system uses Pulse Dial mode you can change a cordless handset to Tone mode for the duration of the active call by pressing the key Tone mode can be used to access other telephone features such as voice mail Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Maintenance e Beginning a Maintenance session 194 e Checking the system version of the software 195 e System administration log record 195 P0607110 Issue O1 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 194 Maintenance Beginning a Maintenance session Maintenance overview A Maintenance session provides information that you can use to diagnose problems that may occasionally arise within the Modular Plus system The Maintenance section of programming has three headings available for System Administrato
241. odular Plus System Administration Guide 178 Call services Erasing a forgotten Call log password If someone forgets their Call log password you can reset it to None so that they can set a new one You cannot set a new password using this method You can only erase an existing one See Call log on page 288 for information about setting a new Call log password See Chart 21 Call log passwords on page 343 in Appendix A for a programming overview 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Password 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Exths 4 Press Next until the display shows Passwords 5 Press Show _ The display shows COS Pswd 6 Press Next The display shows Call log Fsud 7 Press Show The display shows Show estri 8 Enter an extension number 9 Press Show The display shows Log Fswdinnnnn 10 Press CHAHGE to erase the current Call log password 11 Press 48 to exit or to continue in programming Programming Call services See Chart 22 Call services on page 344 in Appendix A for a programming overview 1st Display The Modular Plus system allows extensions to display call information You specify the extension number under CLID extn in Line data The 1st Display option allows you to choose what call information di
242. odular Plus System Administration Guide 92 Barring calls and privileges Restrictions Changing an existing COS password To maintain the security of a Class of service password it is a good idea to change it frequently l Soy p 9 10 11 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press 2 6 6 6 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordg Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Ektns Press Next until the display shows Passwords Press Show The display shows COS rswds Press Show The display shows Show Pswd 3 Enter the password number of the COS password you want to change 00 to 99 Press The display shows Psu followed by the number you chose and the current password Press CHAHGE Enter six digits for the new password Press to exit or to continue in programming Changing the filters assigned to an existing COS password l SD B 10 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Password Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Ektns Press Next until the display shows Passwords Press Show The display shows COS Fauds Press Show The display shows Show Pswd 2 Enter the password number of the COS password whose filter you want to change 00 to 9
243. odular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Saving time with features 283 Enter code If you are checking a speed dial key enter the three digit speed dial code that you want to check F Enter the feature code or press or QUIT to QUIT CLEAR quit programming or CLEAR to clear the numbers you have entered The system accepts the entry as soon as you enter a valid feature code Feature code Press and enter the feature code you want QUIT to assign to the key You cannot enter invalid codes Feature moved You have programmed a key with a feature that was already programmed to another key The feature has moved to the key you just programmed Its original key is now blank Press a ke Press the key you want to check Press or EIT EXIT when you are finished Program and HOLL Enter the number you want to programme and press To erase the key just press Program and OK Enter the number you want to programme and QUIT OK press DE To erase the key press or OK Using Ring Again If you cannot get through to someone on your Modular Plus system because their telephone is busy or there is no answer you can use the Ring Again feature to tell you when they hang up or next use their telephone You can also use the Ring Again feature to tell you when a busy line pool becomes available An internal call to a hunt group extension cannot use the Ring Again feature The Ring Again feature cannot be us
244. oicemail message for this style of telephone Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Using personal features e Background music 224 e Do Not Disturb 224 Personal Speed Dial codes 225 e Using Speed Dial 225 P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 224 Using personal features Background music If an external music source has been connected to your Modular Plus system this feature allows you to play music over your telephone speaker Press 6 The music pauses while you are making or answering a call To cancel press 6 Do Not Disturb Extensions that are members of a hunt group can temporarily leave a hunt group by activating the Do Not Disturb feature Hunt group calls arriving while an extension is in Do Not Disturb mode will be routed to the next member in the hunt group Stopping calls from ringing at your telephone using DND You can stop calls from ringing at your telephone by pressing on an idle extension The display shows Do not disturb Only Priority Calls ring at your telephone A line key will flash when you receive a call but your telephone does not ring Refusing to answer a call While you are on a call you can refuse to answer a second call including a Priority Call Press while your telephone is ringing Cancelling Do Not Disturb Press The display briefly shows Allow calls Your telephone now
245. old only at the telephone where the call is received set Invoke Era Hold to H Even if you set this field to N users can still put selected calls on SWCA keys by pressing a free SWCA key which automatically parks the call on that key and indicates that it is available for pickup at any other telephone with access to that key See Changing the key programming for an extension on page 114 for general information about setting or changing key programming for a telephone See Using SWCA line buttons on page 230 for information about using SWCA keys P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 144 Programming feature settings CLID Match Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fassword I Press 2 6 6 B 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Terminals Extns Press Next until the display shows System Fr9rming Press Show _ The display shows Hunt Grours Press Next until the display shows Featr settings Press Show The display shows Backarmd music Press Next until the display shows SWCA Cntr 1 Press Show _ The display shows Auto Associate H Press CHAHGE to choose the Y or N option Press Next The display shows Invoke b a Hold H Press CHAHGE to choose the Y or N option Press to exit or to continue programming This setting determin
246. ollowed by Fegistrd IfRedistrd does not appear then there is no cordless handset registered at this extension number 12 Press PEREG to de register a currently registered cordless handset 13 Press 48 to exit or to continue programming Note This procedure does not clear the registration data in the cordless handset For information on clearing registration data from the cordless handset see the Cordless Handset Registration Instructions for your model of cordless handset Turning off Master Registration After you have registered the individual cordless handset on the system turn off registration for the entire Modular Plus system 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Password I 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows TerminalssExtrs 4 Press Next until the display shows System Frarming 5 Press Show The display shows Hunt grours 6 Press Next J until the display shows Comranion 7 Press Show The display shows Registration Y 8 Press CHAHGE to change the setting N prevents registration 9 Press 48 to exit or to continue programming What to tell your colleagues This section tells you what information to give to the people who will use the cordless handsets You should have this information ready before you hand out the cordless handsets to the u
247. om The system changes the state of occupied rooms to Needs service on a daily basis at a set time that is configured in the system Maintenance personnel programme the condition of the room to Service done when service in the room is complete The front desk attendant can query or programme the condition of a room with a Hospitality Services admin telephone The Modular Plus system automatically sets the status of a room to Heeds srvc when a Room occupancy status changes from Basic Mid or Full to Vacant P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 56 Programming Hospitality Services Room condition with a room extension To update the Room condition using a room extension 1 Press 7 6 on a Norstar BST extension Press 8 68 7 6 on any M7000 T7000 telephone Press Recall 6 7 6 on an analogue telephone 2 At the prompt enter the status of the room Press on the dialpad to indicate Set to sru done If required enter the Room condition password e Press on the dialpad to indicate Set to needs srw If required enter the Room condition password 3 Ona display telephone the display reads Set to sry done or Set to needs sry On any M7000 or T7000 telephone or analogue telephone replace the handset to exit Room condition with a Hospitality service admin telephone To update or query the Room condition using a Hospitality services admin telephone 1 Press on a two line displ
248. on Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Programming Hunt groups 125 Setting the distribution mode There are three distribution settings for hunt group calls Broadcast rings each extension in the group simultaneously The system handles calls one at a time routing other calls according to the routing option selected in the If bus setting see Programming options if all hunt group members are busy on page 126 When a call is answered the next call in the queue is presented to the hunt group This setting allows all the receptionists in the group can share the load of answering large volumes of calls An example is a fund raising campaign where a group of operators wait to take each call as it comes in Sequential starts the call at the first extension in the hunt group Distribution is complete when the system finds the first free extension This distribution method allows the system to present simultaneous calls to the hunt group Distribution is order based In Sequential mode you can programme your top salesperson to be the first member of the group to receive incoming calls Cyclic distribution begins with the member following the last extension to receive a hunt group call Distribution is complete when the system finds the first free extension This distribution method allows the system to present simultaneous calls to the hunt group Distribution is order based Using Cyclic mode you ensure that your helpline personnel
249. once you have finished a copying session does not indicate the process is complete You can leave the programming session even if the copy has not been completed If you exit programming copying continues uninterrupted until it is complete Event codes capture both the start and completion of the copying process System settings you can copy line assignment line pool access Prime line designation number of intercom keys settings programmed under the heading Carabilities Personal settings you can copy the personal programming for dialling modes line key positions personal speed dial entries automatic delivery of call information for outgoing calls log settings programmed memory keys P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 150 Moving and copying Settings you cannot copy extension number and name log password Direct Dial and Extra Dial extension designations Service mode Control extension designation for a line Service mode ringing extension designation for a line Prime extension designation for a line or private line appearances e personal programming for display contrast ring type and ring volume Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Settings for analogue eguipment e Settings for analogue equipment 152 e Setting the delay before the ATA answers 152 e Changing the dial mode of an ATA 153 e Setting wheth
250. onnect to the call On T7100 M7100N or T7000 M7000 telephones just pick up the handset A call you camped has come back to you but the caller hung up before you could reconnect The telephone to which you have camped a call is out of service or is being used for programming The call has come back to you Press CALLBACK or the line key to reconnect to the call On T7100 M7100N or T7000 M7000 telephones just pick up the handset The line that the camped call is on is in use or that line does not appear at your telephone Release the line or release an internal line Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Routing calls 249 Answering a camped call While you are on a call you hear a beep whenever there is a camped call waiting Press the flashing line key or intercom key that the call is camped on If your extension has no free lines finishing one of your active calls releases a line for the camped call P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 250 Routing calls Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Making external calls e Using an exchange code 252 e Using line pools 252 e Making a conference call 253 e Using Class of service passwords 257 P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 252 Making external calls Using an exchange code You can access exchange lines to m
251. ons 13 Press CHAMGE and use the dial pad to enter the number of the filter to be assigned as the line extension restriction for each schedule There are no default line extension restrictions 14 Press 48 to quit or to continue in programming Class of service passwords Call barring shows you how to customise and apply dialling filters to restrict calls You can temporarily override these filters with a Class of service COS password COS passwords replace one set of filters with another to allow someone to make calls that would otherwise be restricted without giving them complete freedom to make every kind of call COS passwords let you define individual passwords and determine the restriction filter and remote package associated with each A system can have a maximum of 100 six digit COS passwords ranging from 00 to 99 Each password consists of a user filter which replaces the current extension or line extension filter and a line filter which replaces the current line filter Your COS password is in effect only for the duration of your call and does not affect the restrictions placed on other users of the system COS passwords for a system should be determined randomly and should be changed regularly Employee COS passwords should be deleted when an employee leaves the company Typically each user has a separate COS password However several users can share a password or one user can have several passwords Users sho
252. ons 168 Restriction service 159 160 Ringing service 159 Routing 161 schedule 158 turning off with a feature code 168 Show time 286 Software Keys 60 Speed Dial personal 115 225 system 64 using 225 Sguare template T7316E buttons 205 square template T7316 buttons 208 Static Time feature 286 SWCA no free call keys 232 setting controls 143 using 230 Symbols keys 288 System administration log 195 System Programming SWCA controls 143 system settings Direct dial extension 144 System Speed Dial assigning a number 64 bypassing restrictions 67 feature 279 setting up 64 system speed dial alpha tagging 65 system version number 195 T telephone customising 217 moving 146 M7100N 211 M7208N 210 M7310N 209 M7324N 208 power fail 200 telephone keys 15 telephones T7316E default buttons 204 template button assignments 204 207 Three Party Service 305 Time and Date Automatic Time amp Date from the net work 76 changing 73 76 76 changing using the Basic password 75 feature 286 Show 286 P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide Index 352 using BACK 76 timing a call 286 Transfer Callback delay programming 136 transferring a call feature 247 ISDN 319 Troubleshooting 197 200 T7316 Business Series Terminal button defaults 207 T7316E CAP lines 43 CAP station 205 default button assignments 204 T7316E Business Series Terminal button defaults 204 V version number system softwar
253. options See Dialling mode on page 218 for information about using this feature l 9 10 11 12 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi Press 2 8 6 4 6 ADMIN The display shows Terminals Extns Press Show _ The display shows Show extrit Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to programme The display shows nnn innr Press Show _ The display shows Carabilities Press Next until the display shows User Frefernces Press Show _ The display shows Model followed by a five digit code Press Next until the display shows Dialing ort ns Press Show _ The display shows Automatic dial Press CHAHGE to choose Automatic dial Standard dial or Predial Press to exit or to continue in programming Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Programming User preferences 117 Changing the display language The Modular Plus system supports a Visually Impaired Operator Console VIOC which provides computer based speech synthesis for the programming interface To use this function the display language needs to be set to Operating 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Password 3 Press 2 8 J 6 4 6 ADMIN
254. or the filter Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Barring calls and privileges Restrictions 85 13 Press Show _ then to see the overrides for the restriction 14 Use REMOWE ADD the dial pad and OK to change the overrides for the restriction 15 Press 4 to quit or to continue in programming Assigning filters to a telephone Extn restrns Extension restrictions allows you to assign a restriction filter to a telephone to prevent certain numbers from being dialled from that telephone You can assign a different restriction filter for normal service and for each of six schedules See Using alternate or scheduled services on page 158 for more information about the schedules 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 6 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fassuiord 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals amp extrs 4 Press Show The display shows Show extnt i Enter the extension number of the telephone you want to programme The display shows nnn innr Un 6 Press Show The display shows Line access 7 Press Next until the display shows Restrictions 8 Press Show _ The display shows Restrn filters 9 Press Next The display shows Extn restrns 10 Press Show _ The display shows Filters 11 Press Show _ The display shows Hormal
255. ort and 4 port Basic Rate Interface BRI cards The 2 port BRI card supports two loops and the 4 port BRI card supports four loops Each of these loops consists of two separate B channels that can be used to make two simultaneous voice or data calls or one data call and one voice call A video call requires the use of both B channels on the loop Your installer configures the BRI loops for the Modular Plus system The Modular Plus system also supports the DTI card 1 421 Each PRI loop consists of 31 separate channels 30 B channels and a D channel for carrying control and signalling information ISDN applications Using the appropriate ISDN terminal equipment you can access a wide range of business applications Videoconferencing and video telephony Videoconferencing offers instant visual and audio contact between distant parties using either studio based or desktop ISDN terminals e Videoconferencing and video telephony Videoconferencing offers instant visual and audio contact between distant parties using either studio based or desktop ISDN terminals Desktop conferencing ISDN allows computer users in distant locations to share and edit any image data or text file on their own computer screen while simultaneously discussing the information File transfer ISDN allows you to transfer files containing data text image or audio clips faster and cheaper than with a conventional modem Home working Convenient retr
256. other person to press the line button and join your conversation Only two system telephones in addition to the external caller can take part in this kind of conference Answering the next gueued call An attendant who has many calls coming in at once can use Call Queuing to answer the calls in order When there is more than one call ringing you can answer the call that has been ringing longest If you are already on an incoming call and you put it on hold the next longest waiting call is automatically connected 1 After you pick up the handset press 0 fj Answering hunt group calls The three hunt group distribution modes allow you to customise how hunt group calls are distributed in your office In Broadcast mode a single incoming call will ring simultaneously at all the extensions in a group In a busy office you might have three receptionists in a hunt group Each receptionist has a hunt group button on their telephone so incoming calls alert at all three telephones if available and can be answered by any one of the receptionists The other two telephones do not track the call The sequential distribution mode follows the programmed member order when distributing calls The incoming call starts at the first extension in the hunt group and directs the call through the hunt group members in order until a hunt group member answers the call The next hunt group call goes through the same distribution process In this mode
257. ou are connected to an external call Press TRANSFER to transfer the call Either you are receiving an external call forwarded from telephone 221 or you have an answer button for telephone 221 and an external call is ringing on that telephone The call on line 001 is being transferred to you by someone else in your Modular Plus system P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 214 About your system telephones You may see the following displays when using a feature Line i waiting Ho calls waiting Ho line selected Hot in service Farked call CALLBACK Pick uF receiver Priorita gt Z i BLOCK Release a call Use line Fool VES WO Hold or release Release calls Line in use Ho button free A camped call is waiting Press the line button or use Call Queuing to answer the call Press if you have T7100 M7100N telephones You tried to use Call Queuing but no call was ringing at your telephone There is no call ringing at your telephone If you have a flashing line button but your telephone is not ringing press the line button to answer the call on that line The telephone to which you directed a call is not in service or is otherwise unavailable The call is returned to your telephone No one answered the call you parked The call has come back to you You have used the Call Queuing feature without picking up the receiver Auto Handsfree has not been assigned to
258. ou can protect the privacy of your call log by assigning a password A handy feature of the call log is that you can easily use it to place calls to the numbers recorded Call log creates a record of incoming external calls For each call the log could contain the following sequence number in the call log number of the caller indication if the call was long distance indication if the call was answered and who answered time and date of the call number of repeated calls from the same source name of the line that the call came in on Call log can help you to keep track of abandoned or unanswered calls track patterns for your callers for example volume of calls and geographical location of calls record caller information quickly and accurately Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Using display features 289 build a personal telephone directory from log items The long distance indicator as well as the caller s number may not be shown in the log depending on the Call Display services provided by your local telephone company and the caller s local telephone company Setting which calls are logged at an extension You can set which types of incoming calls are logged at your extension The options are Ho autoloaaina Ho one answered only for autologging extensions default setting Unanswered bs me only for autologging extensions but answered elsewhere
259. out the call One or more log entries have been deleted by the Autobumping feature while you are looking at the call log Hold or release your active call before entering Call Log The exchange line is in use The repeat call counter shown along with time and date indicates the number of calls you have received from the same caller This call was answered at another telephone 227 This call was logged manually This call was not answered There are one or more items in your message waiting list and there are one or more new items in your Call Log Press 8 0 6 to change the first line of the display to the current time and date Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Using display features 293 Autobumping Hew calls begin You have viewed your last old log item and can now view your new log items Ho info to log No information is available for the call Ho log assigned No log space has been assigned to the telephone Ho resume item The resume item has been removed because of Autobumping Repeat Call Update or log reallocation while you are looking at the call log Deleting log items Call Charge Your log has a set number of items that it can hold When it becomes full new calls cannot be logged When your log is full Autobumping automatically deletes the oldest Call Log item and logs the new call To enable Autobumping Press 5 The display shows A
260. outing 161 Call Services Auto Called ID 179 Ist Display 178 Camp timeout programming 133 canceling Call Forward 269 CAP KIM plus T7316E 205 line assignment 43 See Central Answering Position Central Answering Position feature 209 line assignment 43 centrex template T7316 buttons 208 Class of service password changing 92 257 changing dialling filter 92 erasing 93 feature 257 overriding filters 88 using 257 CLID programming OLI 48 Commander NT Keystations T7316E and KIM 204 Conference Call feature 253 Conference tones 138 contrast adjustment 117 Control extensions definition 158 programming 168 copying programming 147 settings that can be copied 149 settings that cannot be copied 150 cordless capability 186 cordless handsets deregistering 190 description 186 features 320 registering 187 Registration password 175 187 troubleshooting 200 troubleshooting registration 189 COS See Class of service password D DASS2 lines call charge 293 Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Index 347 date changing 75 defaults buttons T7316 Business Series Terminal 207 buttons T7316E Business Series Terminal 204 destination code 166 destination codes wild cards 165 DIA calls loop guarded and earth calling lines 245 dialling features long tones 296 pause 296 Programmed Release 297 Recall 297 Run Stop 297 Wait for dialtone 298 Dialling filters ACISA private circuit 82 AC15A private ci
261. ows Remote access Fkgs 8 Press Show again The display shows Show pkai 9 Enter the number of the package 00 to 15 10 Press Show _ The display shows LineFool accessi 11 Press Next The display shows Remote rage 12 Press CHAHGE to choose N No or Y Yes 13 Press 48 to exit or to continue in programming P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 184 Remote access Rem line access Remote line access allows you to assign a different remote package to each line in your system L001 Rem pkg l Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press 2 6 6 6 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi Press 7 2 7 6 6 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals amp Extrs Press Next until the display shows System Frarming Press Show _ The display shows Hunt 9rours Press Next until the display shows Remote access Press Show _ The display shows Remote access Fk9s Press Next _ The display shows Fem line access Press Show _ The display shows Show line Enter the line number or press LIST to see line 001 Press CHANGE Enter the number for the remote package that will apply to the line whenever it is used by a remote caller 13 Press 48 to exit or to continue in programming Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Adding cordless capability e Reg
262. pells BASIC on the dial pad l 2 2 A SY Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fassumordi Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Extns Press Next four times The display shows Passwords Press Show The display shows COS F uds Press Next until the display shows Frogrming F uds Press Show _ The display shows SasAdmint Press Next until the display shows Basic Press CHAMGE and enter the new password 10 Press OE to accept the new password P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 174 Passwords Erasing the Basic password If you leave the Basic password blank by entering no digits in step 9 the password is erased If you erase the password anyone can enter Basic programming without a password Hospitality passwords The Hospitality passwords are one to six digits long and allow you to access some or all of the Hospitality Services feature programming There are two types of Hospitality services feature passwords the Desk admin password and the Room condition password Setting the Desk admin password The Desk admin password is used to access all Hospitality Services admin features The default Desk admin password is H 0 EJ P 4677 To change the default Desk admin password 1 Place the programming overlay over th
263. phone 2 Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fassworg I 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Term inals amp extrs 4 Press Show _ The display shows Show extri Enter the extension number of the telephone you want to programme The display shows rninn innr 5 6 Press 7 Press 8 Press 9 Press 10 Press 11 Press Show Next Show Next Show Next The display shows Line access until the display shows Restrictions The display shows Restrn filters until the display shows Extn restrns The display shows Filters until the display shows Allow recalls 12 Press CHAHGE to choose Y Yes or N No 13 Press 48 to exit or to continue in programming Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Barring calls and privileges Restrictions 97 Preventing Redirect The default setting allows an extension to use the Redirect feature l Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press 2 6 6 6 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fassworg I Press 7 2 7 6 6 7 SAPLUS The display shows Term inals amp extrs Press Show _ The display shows Show extr t Enter the extension number of the telephone you want to programme The display shows rnn innr 5 6 Press 7 Press 8 Press 9 Press 10 Press 11 Press Show f Next
264. ple Subscriber Numbering Sub addressing bearer capabilities teleservices The Call Forward All Calls and Transfer features can be used from ISDN terminals connected to Modular Plus Note that Norstar extensions can accept voice calls only Video and data calls do not alert at a Norstar extension Although an ISDN S loop can support up to eight devices the loop has a limit of two B channels An ISDN data or voice terminal uses one B channel for an incoming or outgoing call An ISDN video terminal uses two B channels for an incoming or outgoing call If both B channels are in use other devices on that loop cannot make or receive calls until a B channel is available or until both B channels are available in the case of a video terminal Thus the number of terminals installed on an S loop must take into account whether you require dedicated access for the terminals on that loop P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 302 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Services not availadoes not support the following ISDN services Terminating Line Identification Three Party Service Incoming Outgoing Calls Barred Service Night Busying Fixed Destination Administration Controlled Call Diversion Reasons for Release Separate Channel Numbering Note that Modular Plus extension features other than Transfer and Call Forward All Calls are not available to ISDN terminals In addition
265. ple who process many calls such as secretaries or receptionists 1 After answering an external call press 2 2 Dial the extension number that is the destination for the call Camped calls appear on a line key on the receiving telephone if one is available If there is no line key available you receive a message on the display and hear camp tones Each system telephone can handle only one camped call at a time Note The Call Camping feature will only work if Do Not Disturb DND is programmed to No for that telephone Displays 21 Came max CALLBACK 21 DH CALLBACK Cane denied Came to CANCEL Camred 21 CALLBACK Line B l huna ur Hot in service CALLBACK Release 3 call You tried to camp a call to a telephone that already has a camped call The call has come back to you Press CALLBACK or the line key to reconnect to the call On T7100 M7100N or T7000 M7000 telephones just pick up the handset The person to whom you redirected a call has Do Not Disturb activated The call has come back to you Press CALLBACK or the line key to reconnect to the call On T7100 M7100N or T7000 M7000 telephones just pick up the handset You have tried to camp an internal call You can only camp external calls Dial the number of the internal telephone to which the call is to be sent The telephone to which you camped a call did not answer the call The call has come back to you Press CALLBACK or the line key to rec
266. pool becomes available See Using Ring Again on page 283 Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Making external calls 253 Programming a memory key with a line pool feature code When you programme a key with the line pool feature code you must enter a line pool access code after the feature code The programmed line pool key accesses a specific line pool not the line pool feature See Using line pools on page 252 for more information If you programme a key with an indicator to access a line pool when all the lines in a line pool are busy the indicator for the line pool key turns on The indicator turns off when a line becomes available Making calls from an ISDN terminal Note that ISDN terminals do not have line keys or intercom keys as do Business Series Terminal or Norstar extensions To make an outgoing call from an ISDN terminal access an exchange line by entering a line pool code or a destination code Making a conference call Forming a You can share a call with two other people internal or external by forming a conference Once a conference is established any one of the parties can hang up leaving the other two connected unless the two other parties are on exchange lines In this case if the person who created the conference hangs up the other two parties may be disconnected or they may remain connected depending on the eguipment being used Your system may be programmed to preve
267. press ALL This step is not necessary on a telephone with a single line display 3 Enter the extension number of the person you want to send the message to The display reads Message far au and above the display key MSG Cancelling a message 1 Press The display reads Cancel fori 2 Enter the extension number of the person you sent the message to Viewing received messages You can receive up to four messages from different telephones On a telephone with a two line display 1 Press MSG The display reads nnr called where nnn represents the extension number of the caller 2 Press HEXT to move through your messages On a telephone with a single line display 1 Press 6 6 The display reads the first message you received 2 Press or f to move through your messages Note You cannot view messages on M7100N T7100 or M7000 T7000 telephones A solid light indicates that there is either a message from a Direct Dial extension or a Voicemail message P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 262 Making internal calls Replying to a message You can call the person or your voice message centre who sent a message while you are viewing the message On atelephone with a one line display 1 Press 0 On atelephone with a two line display 1 Press CALL On an M7000 T7000 telephone 1 Press 6 6 The telephone will call the Direct dial extension that left the message
268. pt personal calls on line 1 Press then follow the prompts on your display See Line redirection on page 272 P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 38 System programming introduction Ring Again You can have the Norstar system notify you when an extension is either not busy or has just been used This feature enables you to reach the person on that extension For example Miss Vale has an urgent reguest for Mr Moore When she dials his extension it is busy She uses the Ring Again feature to monitor the line As soon as Mr Moore hangs up Miss Vale s telephone rings to let her know that she can try her call again Dial the extension number press then hang up See Using Ring Again on page 283 Transfer If you are an attendant or if a call should be routed to someone else you can do it easily with Modular Plus For example a client calls Mr Forbes Mr Forbes realizes that it would be better for the client to speak to Ms Smith so he transfers the call to Ms Smith s extension When Ms Smith answers Mr Forbes explains the situation briefly and then hangs up The client remains on the line with Ms Smith Press 0 dial the number then hang up See Transferring a call on page 247 SWCA keys System wide call appearance keys allow anyone in the system to pick up a parked call by entering the feature code that was used to park the call which can be any
269. quire tones longer than the standard 120 milliseconds 1 While ona call press 0 8 2 Use the keypad to produce the appropriate tones Each tone sounds for as long as you hold down the key Note Long Tones can be used on any call except a conference call You can use internal lines of the Modular Plus system to activate a device connected to an Analogue Terminal Adapter ATA in another area of your office or exchange lines to access devices outside the Modular Plus system Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Special dialling features 297 Programmed Release Recall Run Stop The Programmed Release feature performs the function of the key in a programmed dialling sequence When the system encounters a Programmed Release in a dialling sequence it stops dialling and hangs up the call The Programmed Release symbol BB takes up two of the 24 spaces in a programmed dialling sequence The system ignores any digits or commands that follow a Programmed Release in a programmed dialling sequence Press RJ while programming a dialling sequence If your Modular Plus system is connected to a PBX you can use a Recall signal to access special features programme Recall to a memory key for one touch access The Recall signal can also be included as part of a longer stored sequence on an external autodial key or in a speed dial code The Recall symbol 5 uses two of the 24 spaces in a dia
270. r call using the Priority call feature By default telephones are not allowed to make Priority calls If you want a telephone to be able to make a Priority call you must programme Priority call for that extension A person who receives a Priority call while on another call has 8 seconds to accept or block the call For information on blocking calls see Do Not Disturb on page 224 If the person does nothing the Priority call feature puts their active call including conference parties on Exclusive Hold and connects your call See Making a Priority call on page 247 for information on using this feature 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 8 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi 3 Press 2 8 J 6 J 4 6 ADMIN The display shows Terminals Extns 4 Press Show The display shows Show extnt s 5 Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to programme The display shows nnn innr 6 Press twice The display shows Fwd no answer 7 Press until the display shows Priorites calli Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Programming capabilities 109 8 Press CHANGE to choose Y Yes or N No 9 Press to exit or to continue in programming Assigning a Hotline You can set up a Hotline telephone that automatically calls one number internal or external when you lift the handse
271. r example 9 to get an outside line if your system requires P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 292 Using display features it Use the left side of the volume bar or BESF to erase incorrect digits You cannot enter host system signalling codes 3 Selecta line for the call as you normally would for making a call of this type for example by pressing an appropriate line Intercom or Handsfree Mute key or by lifting the handset 4 The displayed number is dialled Note When you edit a number in the log to call that number the edits you make are not saved in the log Programming a telephone to log calls automatically Your installer or Sales Support Officer can programme each telephone to log calls coming in on a line automatically Displays L Unknoun namber 12 12345678938123 HEST ERASE MORE 1231234567990123 HEXT ERASE MORE 1251234567990123 HEXT ERASE MORE 4312345678390123 HEsT ERASE MORE Callis bumped Hold or release In use SETHAME Jan 4 3i00a 3 HEXT ERASE MORE Lineal 1227 HEST ERASE MORE Lineal Jogit HEXT ERASE MORE Line bal HEXT ERASE MORE Messages amp Calls MSG CALLS The caller s number is unavailable indicates a new item 1 indicates that the call was answered 5 indicates a long distance call indicates that the stored number has been shortened to its final 11 digits Press the volume bar or MORE to display additional information ab
272. r it is used On site or Off site change the dial mode for outgoing data of an external ATA to either tone or pulse set whether the ATA should receive confirmation and error tones only for analogue telephones Setting the delay before the ATA answers To accommodate the device connected to the Analogue Terminal Adaptor ATA you may want to lengthen or shorten the delay before the device is able to receive tones For example a modem or fax machine requires only a short delay Refer to the ATA Terminal Feature Card for information on using the ATA features See Chart 16 ATA settings on page 339 in Appendix A for a programming overview The ATA answer timer controls this delay The default setting is a seven second delay before the speech path is connected Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Settings for analogue eguipment 153 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press 2116 618 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fassuordi Press 7 2 7 6 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Extns 4 Press Show _ The display show Show extn 5 Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to programme The display shows nnn innr 6 Press Show The display shows Line access 7 Press Next The display shows Carabilities 8 Press Show _ The display shows Fud no answer 9 Press Next unt
273. r lines answer or handsfree cannot be used as autodial keys If the power to your Modular Plus system is off for more than three days autodial numbers as well as some other system programming may be lost from the memory Autodial key for an external number 1 Press The display briefly shows Extern1 autodial then Press a key 2 Press the key you want to programme This step is not necessary on M7100N T7100 telephones which have only one memory key 3 Ifyou want this autodial key to use a particular line or line pool select that line or press the key labelled Intercom and enter the line pool code or destination code Note The keystation must be assigned with the lines or line pools 4 Enter the number 5 Press or GK when you are finished The display shows Frogrammed P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 280 Saving time with features Autodial key for an extension number 1 Press 2 The display briefly shows Intern autodial then Press a key 2 Press the key you want to programme The display shows Extn This step is not necessary on M7100N T7100 telephones which have only one memory key 3 Enter the number The display shows Programmed For M7100N T7100N telephones an external autodialer can only be programmed using a line and not a line pool If you do not include a line selection in an autodial number the call uses your Prime line if you have one No
274. r programming System version Displays the version number of the System Processor software Clear lines Clears a hung line See Clearing a hung line on page 199 for more information Sys admin log Displays a list of system initialisations programming sessions invalid password attempts and password changes You can run a Maintenance session from any working T7316 T7316E M7310N or M7324N telephone Only one person at a time can access a Maintenance session Photocopy the System Administration log found at the end of this chapter and use it to record maintenance information Follow these steps any time you enter a Maintenance session 1 Release all calls on your telephone 2 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 3 Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi 4 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Extns 5 Press until the display shows Maintenance When necessary refer back to these five steps about how to begin a Maintenance programming session Only one person at a time can access a Maintenance session Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Maintenance 195 Checking the system version of the software System version tells you the version number of the system processor software found in the Feature card The release version can be used to trace any soft
275. r programming telephone Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fassworg I Press 7 2 7 5 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Extns Press The display shows Hunt arours Press Show _ The display shows Shaw aroari Enter the hunt group number you want to programme 01 30 Press Show The display shows Member estns Press until the display shows If busi Press CHAHGE to set the mode BusyTone Overflow Queue 10 Press to exit or Next _ to continue programming Programming the queue timeout This setting allows you to programme the number of seconds a call remains in the hunt group queue before it is also routed to the overflow position 1 E A 11 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fassword I Press 7 2 7 6 6 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terninals amp Extris Press Next until the display shows System Fr9rming Press Show The display shows Hunt Srours Press Show The display shows Shaw aroari Enter the hunt group number you want to programme 01 30 Press The display shows Member extns Press until the display shows Timeouts Press CHAHGE to set the queue timeout 15 30 45 60 120 or 180 Press to exit or Next to continue programming P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Adminis
276. r to be QUIT ALL redirected The lines light up as you press them Once you cancel redirection for a line you cannot restore it by pressing the line again Press ALL to cancel redirection for all your lines When you are finished press or Ok Select lineis Continue to press the lines that are no ALL OK longer to be redirected Press or OK when you are finished Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Forwarding calls 277 P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide Saving time with features e Using system Speed Dial 279 e Using Autodial 279 e Using Redial 281 e Programming memory keys 282 e Using Ring Again 283 e Using Hotline 284 P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide Saving time with features 279 Using system Speed Dial Freguently dialled numbers can be programmed with system Speed Dial codes so that they can be accessed guickly with a three digit code After programming Speed Dial codes distribute a list of system Speed Dial codes for your office 1 Press a 2 Enter the appropriate three digit Speed Dial code 001 to 255 Note To programme personal Speed Dial codes 256 to 279 at your extension see Personal Speed Dial codes on page 225 Using Autodial You can programme memory keys for one touch dialling of internal or external telephone numbers Keys used fo
277. rcuits 91 extensions 82 lines 82 overriding 88 dialling modes 218 dialling options 116 dialling restriction defaults 83 DID template T7316 buttons 208 Digital Network Adapter features 302 Direct dial extension 144 Direct Dial extension and cordless handsets 187 assigning a telephone 78 107 assigning an extension 260 external extension 79 internal extension 78 programming 78 disconnecting accidentally 237 display common feature messages 213 contrast 117 219 keys 18 language 117 VIOC 117 distinctive ring pattern Hunt Group 124 distinctive ring patterns DRP answering a call 228 Diversion 305 DNA See Digital Network Adapter DND See Do Not Disturb Do Not Disturb feature 224 Do Not Disturb on Busy cancelling 103 DIA lines 103 Hunt groups 103 setting up 102 103 E earth calling lines DIA calls 245 ETSI ISDN 270 exchange code 252 exchange line and telephone assignment 43 exchange lines assigning a filter 91 Executive Intrusion 305 extension Alarm 141 Direct dial 144 locking off 94 locking on 94 naming 70 programming 100 118 relocation 146 restriction filters 85 External Call Forward 270 F feature Autobumping 293 Autodial 279 Automatic hold 240 Background Music 224 Call Camping 248 Call duration time 286 Call Forward All Calls 271 Call Forward All Calls ISDN 319 Call Forward No Answer 100 Call Forward on Busy 102 Call Information services 287 P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System
278. receives calls normally Using Do Not Disturb Once you turn Do Not Disturb on calls are forwarded to the Prime extension only if there is no other telephone on which the line appears If there is another telephone that shares the same line the call may be answered by that person Do Not Disturb also prevents voice calls from alerting at your telephone Voice calls are presented as normal internal calls on the Intercom key Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Using personal features 225 Personal Speed Dial codes You can guickly dial external telephone numbers that have been programmed onto Speed Dial codes Speed Dial codes 001 to 255 are programmed for the entire system by the system administrator under the System Speed Dialing heading These codes are valid for any telephone that is allowed to use speed dialing keys See Assigning a number to a System speed dial code on page 64 256 279 are personal and may be programmed differently at each telephone by the user These can also be programmed by you as part of the telephone programming and changed by the user as needed Using Speed Dial System Speed Dial programming allows you to assign three digit Speed Dial codes to the external numbers your colleagues call most frequently Personal Speed Dial programming allows individuals to programme their own Speed Dial numbers Speed Dial numbers are subject to the same restriction filters as
279. regularly dialled numbers However you can programme system Speed Dial numbers to bypass dialling restrictions Speed Dial numbers may include host system signaling codes Note There is no difference between using personal Speed Dial and using system Speed Dial They differ only in how they are programmed Adding or changing Personal Speed Dial 1 Press a 2 Enter a three digit code from 256 to 279 that you want to associate with a telephone number 3 To include a line selection for this number press the line or intercom key To select a line pool press a programmed line pool key or press the programmed button labelled Intercom and enter a line pool access code On the M7100N T7100 telephones you can only select a line pool 4 Enter the number you want to programme 5 Press or OK P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 226 Using personal features Displays that occur for the personal speed dial feature LA CAHCL BESP OK Enter digits QUIT Ok Error code Ha number stored Program and HOLD Program and OK QUIT Ok Select a line Unknown namber Speed dial Ho free lines LATER Making a Speed Dial call Continue entering the number you wish to programme You can change the number by pressing EKSF or the volume control When you are finished press or Ok Enter the telephone number you wish to programme exactly as you would if you were dialling it normal
280. ress Next The display shows TotalCalls The value shown is the total number of calls received by the hunt group to a maximum of 99999 Press Next The display shows Ans The values shown are the total number of calls that were answered and the percentage of answered calls to total calls Press Next The display shows Ava ans sec The value shown is the average time in seconds that it took to answer a call to a maximum of 999 Press Next The display shows Abndn The values shown are the number of abandoned calls and the percentage of abandoned calls to total calls Press Next The display shows Buz The values shown are the number of times the hunt group was busy and the percentage of busy calls to total calls P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 130 Programming Hunt groups 14 Press Next The display shows O uerf1z The values shown are the number of calls sent to the overflow position and the percentage of overflow calls to total calls 15 Press Next The display shows Ava Gisec The value shown is the average time in seconds the call waited in the queue to a maximum of 999 16 Press 48 to exit or to continue programming Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Programming feature settings e Background music 132 e On hold 132 e Receiver volume 133 e Camp timeout 133 e Park timeout
281. ring a call 228 Privacy feature external calls only 228 Answering the next queued call 229 e Answering hunt group calls 229 e Multiple appearances of DIA lines 230 e Using SWCA line buttons 230 Using Handsfree 233 Answering a telephone using Directed Pickup 234 e Answering a telephone using Pickup Group 235 e Answer keys 236 e Listening in a group 237 e Disconnecting Accidentally 237 P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 228 Answering calls Answering a call When a call rings at the telephone pick up the handset or press the button marked Handsfree Mute to connect the call Sorting calls by distinctive ring patterns When lines are configured on your system they can be assigned one of four distinctive ring patterns DRP The default for all telephones and lines is None which is the lowest priority Call ringing When multiple calls are presented to the telephone the call with the highest priority DRP setting will be the call that rings at the telephone Call answering When multiple calls are presented to a telephone and the user picks up the handset the call with the highest priority DRP setting is the call that is presented Note External calls always have a higher priority than internal calls Note If the ring type is changed on a telephone after the DRPs are set on the line
282. rvice you can view the number of an external caller unless the caller has blocked the information Lines in your Modular Plus system may appear at more than one extension However only one extension can receive Call Information automatically for an incoming call You programme which Norstar BST extension will automatically receive Call Information If Call Information is not delivered automatically to your extension and your company subscribes to the service you can view Call Information using the Call Information feature code Cordless handsets receive Call Information automatically ISDN terminals receive Call Information automatically if supported by the terminal Note Not all calls on ISDN lines necessarily provide Call Information because of the way the call is routed or because the information was lost or corrupted Call Information gives you information about your active call or the highest priority ringing call Call Information is more detailed than the Call Display information you can receive without subscribing to Call Information For external calls you can display the caller s telephone number line name or a combination of these items For an internal call it is possible to display the caller s name and their extension number It is also possible to display information for ringing answered or held calls Call Information displays even if the call has been transferred forwarded or re routed in some way C
283. s HEXT Carabilities SHOW Fug no answer HEXT 8 times Press CHANGE to choose between Extni Extn Extra Extrid Extns and Hone HEXT Priority call Press CHAHGE to choose between Yes and H No HEXT Press CHANGE to select None Intrnl or Extrnl Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Charts 335 Chart 12 Extension capabilities 4 Terminals Extns SHOW Show extn Enter extension number SHOW Line access t HEXT Carabilities SHOW Fud no answer HEXT 11 times Aux ringer Press CHANGE to choose between Yes and H No HEXT Press CHAHGE to choose between Yes and H No HEXT Press CHANGE to choose between Yes and H No MEST ATA settings P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 336 Charts Chart 13 User preferences User prefernces SHOW Model Press to see the setting Press CHANGE to enter an extension number i MEST Key Prarming Press to see settings Press CHANGE and to change keys MEST ikercpeeddiai Press to see speed dial codes Press CHAHGE and to change numbers MEST Call log ort ns Press to see settings Press CHAHGE to select from Ho one answered Unanswerd by me Log all calls and Ho autologging MEST Dialling opt ns Press to see settings Press CHAHGE to select from Automatic dial Standard dial and Fre Dial MEST Language Pr
284. s and H No Chart 2 Naming extensions TerminalstExktns SHOW Show extnt Enter extension number i SHOW Line access HEXT Carabilities HEST Hame Press CHANGE and enter new name Press NEXT Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Charts 327 Chart 3 Naming lines Lines SHOW Press CHANGE and enter new name Chart 4 Time and date If between 00 and 12 select AM or PM Press CHANGE and enter minutes 00 59 Press CHANGE and enter year 2 digits A Press CHANGE and enter hour 2 digits Press CHANGE and enter month 01 12 Dau Press CHAHGE and enter day 01 31 P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 328 Charts Chart 5 Direct Dial System ergrming SHOW Hunt Srours i HEAT Featr settings MEST Direct dial SHOW SHOW Press CHANGE to select Intrnl Extrnl or Hone Intern lt If Intrnl or Extrnl press CHANGE and enter number Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Charts 329 Chart 6 Restriction filters Restrictions SHOW Restrn filters SHOW Show filters Enter a restriction filter number 01 to 99 SHOW Restren fltinn 7 SHOW Restrn nn SHOW Ho restrictions ADD Rest nit l Enter digits to be restricted Press OK Press ADD to add more restrictions to this filter SHOW Press REMOVE
285. s guide tells you to enter a feature code you press the memory key as a shortcut In some cases pressing the key a second time cancels the feature Any memory key not programmed as an external or internal line a target line a hunt group indicator intercom answer key or handsfree key is available for programming features You can erase a memory key but you cannot erase answer handsfree intercom or line keys You cannot programme the these feature codes to a memory key Long Tones for signalling remote devices see Setting long tones on page 296 Any code beginning with except 0 Language Choice Contrast Adjustment and OJ to SWCA keys When you programme a key with the line pool feature code you must enter a line pool access code after the feature code The programmed line pool key accesses a specific line pool not the line pool feature Programming a memory key 1 Press Ce 8 2 Press the key you want to programme with a feature This step is not necessary on the M7100N T7100 telephones which have only one memory key 3 Enter the feature code you want to assign to the key Erasing a key 1 Press HE 2 Press the feature key 3 Press or OK to erase the key Displays Feature name gt The name of the feature assigned to a key is SHOW Ok displayed when you press the key SHOW appears when there is more information available Press or SHOW for additional information M
286. s System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Adding cordless capability 189 Troubleshooting registration If you cannot register a cordless handset ensure the batteries are charged and properly installed For more information see the Cordless Handset User Guide for your model of cordless handset If you receive an overflow tone either the extension number is invalid or the cordless handset is already registered against another extension number on the system It is best if only one person registers cordless handsets at a time If you are unable to register a cordless handset make sure that e Master Registration is set to Y you are able to establish a radio connection the radio connection icon in the cordless handset display is lit you are using the correct Registration password For more information see Registration password on page 187 the extension number you are trying to assign is available Make sure that the extension number really is the one you want to use You may have to de register another cordless handset first Checking if an extension is available for registration When you register a cordless handset you assign it an extension number on the Modular Plus system This implies that no other cordless handset is registered against that extension number The extension number must be available for registration to succeed You can check the extension number registration status The available conditions
287. s controlled by four passwords Installer password allows you to see and change any item in programming System Administrator Plus password provides knowledgeable users with access to all but a few sensitive areas of programming Administrator password used to view and change the settings that are part of day to day administration of the Norstar system Basic password only used with a limited number of feature codes to change programming and control system services The following tables show the items that can be programmed when using the System Administrator Plus password or the Administrator password Programming using the SAPLUS password Terminals amp Extns Services System prgrming Line access Ringing service Hunt groups Capabilities Restrn service Featr settings Name Routing service Direct dial User prefernces Common settings Remote access Restrictions Sys speed dial Companion Call services Passwords Hospitality Lines COS pswds Software Keys Name Call log pswds SysID Restrictions Progrming pswds Password keys Reg pswd Maintenance Hospitality pswd System version Time amp Date Clear lines Sys admin log Programming using the Administrator password Usage Metrics Terminals amp Extns Lines Passwords Capabilities Name Call log pswds Name Services Progrming pswds User prefernces Ringing service Reg psw
288. s feature might be reguired for example in times of emergency or to make an important announcement when the recipient is on another call El is similar in functionality to Norstar Priority Call It is however a receive only feature on Norstar extensions that is EI cannot be initiated from a Norstar extension The originating caller would be on another PBX on the DPNSS 1 network When El is used to intrude on a call in progress a three way connection is established between the originating party and the two parties on the call The result is very much like a conference call When one of the three parties clears the line the other two remain connected and EI is terminated The extension receiving the intrusion will display Intrusion Call A warning indication tone will sound after intrusion has taken place and the standard conference call tone will sound every 20 seconds 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fassuordi 3 Press 2 8 J 6 4 6 ADMIN The display shows Terminals Extns 4 Press Show The display shows Show extnt i Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to programme The display shows nnn innr Press Show _ The display shows Carabilities Press until the display shows Intrusion Press Show The display shows Frotect 141 Press CHAHGE to select the level of intrusion
289. sers Read the Cordless Handset User Guide for your model of cordless handset Familiarise yourself with the cordless handset and its basic operation As you hand out the cordless handsets with the Cordless Handset User Guides and Using your Cordless Handset system feature cards be prepared to demonstrate the basic use of the cordless handsets You may find it convenient to call people together for a brief training session and go over the Cordless Handset User Guides with them P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 192 Adding cordless capability Also give your users the following information 1 Your name and telephone number Your colleagues can write your name and number on the system feature cards so that they can contact you for information and help about the system 2 Where they can use the cordless handsets Tell people where they can use their cordless handsets within the building Explain that voice guality will degrade and they will lose their connection if they move out of the coverage area Tell them that their cordless handsets have been registered with your system If cordless handsets have been registered to more than one system show them how to switch from one system to another 3 How to switch between cordless handset and desk telephones Use the Transfer feature described in the Using your Cordless Handset system feature card for your model of cordless handset Note A person wh
290. service Ringing groups 001 100 Show group _ Ring grp 01 Show extn _ 221 Assigned all others Unassign Sched Night Service Manual Auto Off Trunk answer Y ExtraDial 221 Line settings Show line _ Ring grp 001 Aux ringer N Sched Evening Sched Lunch Sched Sched 4 Sched Sched 5 Sched Sched 6 Restrn service Sched Night Service Manual Auto Off Sched Evening Sched Lunch Sched Sched 4 Sched Sched 5 Sched Sched 6 Routing service Routes 000 999 Show route _ Rte 000 DialOut No numbr Max 24 digits Use Pool O Dest codes Show DstCode _ Normal 000 AbsorbLength All Night None Evening None Lunch None Sched 4 None Sched 5 None Sched 6 None Sched Night Service Manual Auto Off Overflow N Sched Evening Sched Lunch Sched Sched 4 Sched Sched 5 Sched Sched 6 P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 28 System programming introduction Common settings Control extns For lines Show line _ L001 221 For extns Show extn _ 221 221 Schedule names Sched 1 Night Sched 2 Evening Sched 3 Lunch Sched 4 Sched 4 Sched 5 Sched 5 Sched 6 Sched 6 Schedule times Monday Sched Night Start time 23 00 Stop time 07 00 Sched Evening Sched Lunch Sched Sched 4 Sched Sched 5 Sched Sched 6 Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Sunday Sys speed dial Speed dial Max 24 digits XXX No Number lt extern extn gt Use prime li
291. shown in the following illustrations T7316E P0607110 Issue O1 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 16 Introduction M7310N M7324N The following table indicates what each type of key does 0 keypad Used for dialling numbers when you are making calls and for entering numbers and letters when you are programming 2 Display Shows instructions for using and programming the telephone Display key Activates the instruction that appears on the display above the display key 4 Memory key Activates a number or feature code stored in the key O Dual memory key Can store two numbers or feature codes M7310N only O Shift key Press the Shift key before a dual memory key to activate the number or feature code stored in the secondary memory of the dual memory key M7310N only Feature ke ta or Fx Allows you to enter a feature code while using or programming the telephone Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Introduction 17 Hold key Puts an active call on hold e Hold O Release key Hangs up an active call or ends C gt Co programming D Mute key Mutes handset and microphone Only available on T7316 and T7316E US keystations o Handsfree key Turns on speaker so user does not have to pick up handset or use headset ACS Only available on T7316E keystations B Hea
292. shows AM Press CHANGE to select PM gt 5 Press HEXT The display shows Minutes 6 Press CHANGE or HEXT if you do not need to change the minutes 7 Enter the minutes 00 to 59 8 9 Press HEXT The display shows eari Press CHAMGE or HEXT if you do not need to change the year 10 Enter the last two digits of the current year 11 Press HEST The display shows Months 12 Press CHAHGE or HEXT if you do not need to change the month P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 76 Changing the time and date 13 Enter the month 01 to 12 14 Press HEXT The display shows Dart 15 Press CHANGE 16 Enter the day of the month 01 to 31 17 Press to exit Changing the time by an hour Modular Plus offers two features that allows you to adjust the time guickly for changes in British Standard Time Moving one hour forward with FWD 1 Press e B FWD The display shows Forward bea LHF 2 Press YES The display briefly shows Time Changed Moving one hour backward with BACK 1 Press BACK The display shows Backward b a 1Hr 7 2 Press YES The display briefly shows Time Charged Automatic Time amp Date When an outgoing BRI or a PRI call is answered the network may provide time and date information to the Modular Plus system The Auto Time amp Date feature enables the Modular Plus system to use this information to automatically update the time a
293. shows Extn restrns 10 Press Show The display shows Filters 11 Press Next until the display shows Allow last mai 12 Press CHAHGE to choose Y Yes or N No 13 Press 48 to exit or to continue in programming Preventing Saved Number Redial The default setting allows an extension to use the Saved Number Redial feature 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Password I Press 7 2 7 6 6 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Extis Press Show _ The display shows Show extr t Enter the extension number of the telephone you want to programme The display shows nnn innr Press Show The display shows Line access P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 96 Barring calls and privileges Restrictions 7 Press 8 Press 9 Press 10 Press 11 Press Next Show Next Show Next until the display shows Restrictions The display shows Restrn filters The display shows Extn restrns The display shows Filters until the display shows Allow saved noi 12 Press CHAHGE to choose Y Yes or N No 13 Press 48 to exit or to continue in programming Preventing Recall The default setting allows an extension to use the Recall feature 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming tele
294. so that you can speak privately while you are on a handsfree call Press the button labelled Handsfree Mute or Mute The microphone is turned off To turn the microphone back on again and continue your handsfree call press the button labelled Handsfree Mute or Mute Note The indicator next to the button labelled Handsfree is solid when you are in handsfree mode It flashes when you mute the microphone P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 234 Answering calls Changing a handset call to a handsfree call Press the button labelled Handsfree and hang up the handset Changing a handsfree to a regular call Lift the handset Hints for using handsfree Wait for your caller to finish talking before you speak The microphone and speaker cannot be on at the same time Your caller s voice may be cut off if you both speak at the same time Noises such as a tapping pencil could be loud enough to turn on your microphone and cut off your caller s speech To prevent a possible echo keep the area around your telephone free of paper and other objects that might screen your microphone Turning down the microphone volume press the volume control while speaking also prevents echoes When you change the volume level both the microphone and speaker volume are adjusted to prevent feedback problems Place the telephone so that any unavoidable local noise such as an air conditioner is behind it This limits
295. splays first on that extension Depending on the services you subscribe to Call Display information may contain the number of the caller the name of the line in your Modular Plus system that the call is on the name of the caller if you have a system speed dial specified for the caller with the name of the caller also specified Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Call services 179 Auto called ID 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 6 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Passwords 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terninals amp Extris 4 Press Show _ The display shows Show extri Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to programme The display shows nnn innr 6 Press Show __ The display shows Line access 7 Press Next until the display shows Call services 8 Press Show _ The display shows Auto call info 9 Press Next The display shows istDisFlay 10 Fress CHANGE to choose Name Numb or Line On an incoming call the display may show Unknown number if the information is not available from your telephone company You may see Private number on the display if the caller blocks that information Un This setting applies to Norstar BST extensions only Cordless handsets receive CLID ISDN terminals can receive CLID automatically if supported by
296. ss until the display shows Sys speed dial P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 66 Setting System speed dial 5 Press Show _ The display shows Sreed dial 6 Enter the system Speed dial code 001 to 255 you want to use 7 Press Show _ The display shows the number currently assigned to the code or Ho number 8 Press until the display shows Disrlay digits 9 Press CHAHGE to choose H No No means the display shows a name for the code 10 Press Next The display shows Hame s535 sFd di Press to see the rest of the display 11 Press CHAHGE The display shows Hames 12 Enter the name you want to give to the Speed Dial code Enter the name by pressing the appropriate key on the dialpad until the first letter of the name is displayed Press gt then enter the next letter of the name and so on Up to 16 characters are allowed Press to add spaces 13 Press lt 8 to exit or to continue in programming CLID name display alpha tagging If your system allows name display you can specify a name for a System Speed dial and when an outside call comes in over a number only analogue line or target line that matches the system speed dial number the name of that speed dial displays If you do not specify a name for the system speed dial only the number or line displays Note For name display to occur the calling number must also match the system speed
297. stem Administration Guide 168 Programming Services Turning a manual service on or off with a feature code There are separate on and off codes for each of the services Ringing Routing and Restriction BJZ Turn on Ringing service E BJ ZJE Turn off Ringing service B 7 2 Turn on Restriction service E BJJ Turn off Restriction service 8 7 BJ Turn on Routing service B8 17 6 Turn off Routing service To turn on a service From a Control extension enter the feature code to turn Ringing Restriction or Routing service on If activating Restriction or Routing service use the password 2 8 6 4 6 ADMIN The display shows Service Modes OH To turn off a service From a Control extension enter the feature code to turn Ringing Restriction or Routing service off The display shows Hormal followed by the name of the service Ringing Restr n or Routing Assigning control extensions When Ringing service and Restriction service are set to Manual a control extension is used to place the extensions and exchange lines that it controls into and out of service schedules A control extension can be assigned to control either lines or extensions or both lines and extensions You can also use a control extension to manually override an automatic Schedule You may want different lines to be assigned to different control extensions For example if the Customer Service departmen
298. stration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Saving time with features 281 Feature moved You have programmed an autodial number to a key that had a feature code programmed The feature has moved to another key Use 0 Key Inquiry feature to locate it Using Redial You can save the number of any external call you dialled and call it again later You can also redial the last external number you dialled Saving a number to redial later While you are still on the call press 6 7 Saved Number Redial records a maximum of 24 digits Redialling a saved number Press 6 7 when you are not on a call If you have a programmed Saved Number Redial key you can use 0 Key Inquiry then press the Last Number Redial key followed by to check the last number before you dial it You can disallow this feature in programming Refer to Preventing Saved Number Redial on page 95 Last Number Redial Press 6 Last Number Redial records a maximum of 24 digits If you have a programmed Last Number Redial key you can use 0 Key Inquiry then press the Last Number Redial key followed by to check the last number before you dial it This feature can be disallowed on individual keystations Refer to Preventing Last Number Redial on page 95 P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 282 Saving time with features Programming memory keys You can programme a feature code to a memory key When thi
299. swering the next queued call on page 229 the display will show Release Line HAA This will be the line name of the highest priority queued call Restrictions by set type Call Offer is indicated differently on different types of extensions M7000 T7000 the associated LED or LCD will flash and a tone is heard ATA Call Offer is supported as a Camp On feature a tone is heard ISDN not supported Cordless Handsets not supported DNA not supported P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 310 Digital Private Network Signalling System Number 1 DPNSS 1 User Actions The party receiving a Call Offer has three choices as follows Ignore it After a programmed time interval the Offer will terminate Reject it using 4 Using Do Not Disturb DND will also reject the Offer the line indicator for external incoming calls still flashes However the user must remember to release DND following the call using Ce 8 6 A call cannot be offered to a busy extension with DND on busy programmed Note Call Forward on busy takes priority over DND on busy Also Call Offer cannot be accepted by putting an active call on hold Accept it The Offer is accepted by releasing the active call Route Optimisation Route Optimisation is a DPNSS 1 feature for Norstar that allows calls to follow the optimum route between two end PBXs This allows efficient use of network resources
300. sword unless the password has been changed Check the Modular Plus Programming Record for the most recent password Ending a programming session Possible disrlau Press 4 to end the session CHANGE End of session After a few seconds the time and date re appear on the display The system proceeds with any changes you make to programming as soon as you move away from a setting either by using the navigation keys or by pressing You can check to see if the changes you made to telephone programming took effect by pressing the IFDATE display key The display shows you how many telephones have not been updated yet Using passwords to access programming There are three passwords for Administration programming 7 21 7 65 6 7 SAPLUS The System Administrator Plus password accesses all the settings for Administration programming plus several installer settings 2IB 6 4 6 ADMIN The Administrator password accesses most of the settings for Administration programming 2 2 7 4 BASIC The Basic password accesses a few settings that can be changed using feature codes The Basic password allows you to delegate some of the duties of being an administrator without allowing access to sensitive P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 20 Introduction programming It should be given out with care and changed when necessary for example when someone leaves
301. t F Next Directd pickup Vmsg ctr data F Next Page tone Call Services Show k Next Page Timeout Companion Show Fk Next AutoTime amp Date Next ma H Next Call log space Se F Next Alarm Extn Software keys gt Show H Sys ID Hospitality F Next Extn relocation Next Password Show F Next Answer Extn S Si keys FH Next SWCA Cntrl k Show Auto Associate F Next Invoke by Hold Mainenenge Show HF Next CLID match Next System version Rem access pkgs Usage Metrics Show Next Clear lines Room desk info k Show Show pkg F Next Sys admin log F Show Show extn Fk Next Rem line access F Next Call restrns F Show Show line Hunt Groups Fk Next Service time F Next Alarm Te k Show Attn attempts Registration ole F Next Retry intrvl The F symbol means Press F Next Attn durati For example ex M gurangn Press Show Press Next or F Next Time format Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 System programming introduction e Conventions used in this guide 24 e Programming overview 24 e Using password 30 e Programmable settings and features 32 e Making suggestions 39 e Advice Line 39 P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 24 System programming introduction Conventions used in this guide This section describes the programming choices available to assist you in designing a system that is efficient for your business
302. t is open during evening hours you could place the Customer Service lines under a separate control extension The Sales department which closes at the end of the afternoon could be placed under a different control extension that could call on a service schedule for those lines while leaving the Customer Service lines unaffected Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Programming Services 169 Assigning lines to a control extension 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 6 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Extns 4 Press Next _ until the display shows Serwices 5 Press Show The display shows Ringing service 6 Press Next J until the display shows Common settings 7 Press Show The display shows Control extn 8 Press Show twice The display shows Show line 9 Enter the line number The display shows the line number followed by the current control extension 10 Press CHAMGE and enter the extension number you want to assign as the control extension for this line 11 Press 48 to exit or to continue in programming Assigning extensions to a control extension In addition to placing lines into Service modes a control extension can apply Restriction service dialling filters to other extensions 1 P
303. t on any telephone as no telephone has an autodial button for itself The position that would be taken by the autodial button for itself is blank T7316 BST upper buttons Button 23 Button 31 Button 25 Button 33 Button 27 Q Button 24 Button 29 42 Button 26 P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 208 About your system telephones T7316 BST lower button assignments Button Square template Button Function Function 11 Set221 17 Set 224 13 Set 222 19 Set 225 15 Set 223 21 Set 226 01 Line 1 06 Conf Trans 02 Line 2 07 Last No 03 Call Fwd 08 Voice Call 04 Pick Up 09 Intercom 05 Page 10 Intercom PBX template Hybrid template 11 Set221 17 Set 224 11 Set221 17 Set 224 13 Set 222 19 Set 225 13 Set 222 19 Set 225 15 Set 223 21 Set 226 15 Set 223 21 Set 226 01 DND 06 Conf frans 01 Line 1 06 Conf Trans 02 Transfer 07 Last No 02 Line pool 07 Last No 03 Call Fwd_ 08 Voice Call 03 Call Fwd 08 Voice Call 04 Pick Up 09 Intercom 04 Pick Up _ 09 Intercom 05 Page 10 Intercom 05 Page 10 Intercom M7324N telephone and CAPN The M7324N telephone has a two line display three display keys 24 memory keys with indicators and Handsfree capability M7324N memory key assignments
304. t or press the key labelled Handsfree For example you can have an external Hotline to your local taxi company for your customers to use A hunt group extension number can be specified as a Hotline telephone Label the telephone telling people that it is a Hotline and what number it dials so that they do not use it mistakenly See Using Hotline on page 284 for information on using this feature 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi 3 Press 2 8 J 6 J 4 6 ADMIN The display shows Terminals Extns 4 Press Show The display shows Show extr t 5 Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to programme The display shows rninn innr 6 Press twice The display shows Fwd no answer 7 Press until the display shows Hotline 8 Press CHAHGE to select the type of call the hotline makes None Intrnl or Extrnl Choosing Internal assigns an extension number Choosing External assigns an external number If you select an external number 9 Press Show _ The display shows Extrn1 Hone 10 Press CHANGE 11 Enter the telephone number as you would dial it Press QE 12 Press Next then CHAHGE to choose Use prime line Use line Pool code or Use routing tabl 13 Press 48 to exit or to continue in programming Bypassing a Hotline Press a line key or use the
305. tal Private Network Signalling System Number 1 DPNSS 1 DPNSS 1 services 304 Three Party Service 305 Diversion 306 Redirection 307 Executive Intrusion 308 Call Offer 309 Route Optimisation 310 Message Waiting Indication 311 Loop avoidance 314 Feature quick reference Modular Plus feature codes 316 ISDN terminal features 318 Cordless handset features 320 ATA extension features 321 303 315 SECTION III Appendix A Programming overviews 323 Charts Index 325 345 P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide SECTION I System Administration P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 10 System Administration Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Introduction e Safety and Regulatory information 12 e You must be the administrator 13 e Here s what you need to start programming 13 Understanding the telephone keys 15 Starting a programming session 19 e Ending a programming session 19 e Using passwords to access programming 19 e Understanding your system 20 e Map of Administrator Plus programming 20 P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 12 Introduction Safety and Regulatory information Markings the following This device conforms to Directive 1999 5 EC on Radio Eguipment and Telecommunications Terminal Eguipment as a
306. te If line pool access codes or destination codes are changed remember to re programme autodial numbers as well Displays 387 QUIT BESF OK Autodial full key erased Enter digits QUIT OK Intercom _ QUIT Invalid number Press a key QUIT Program and HOLD Program and OK QUIT Ok Progranmed Continue to enter digits until the number is complete Press the volume bar or BESF to erase an incorrect digit Press or Ok when you are finished The memory allotted to autodial numbers in your Modular Plus system is full While programming external Autodial you erased the key by pressing or Ok before entering any digits Enter the number you wish to programme choosing the line first if necessary exactly as you would if you were making a call Enter the internal telephone number you wish to programme You are programming an internal autodial key and have entered a number that is not an extension number on your system Enter a valid extension number If the number you are entering is a destination code use external autodial Press the memory key you want to programme Enter the number you want to programme to the key then press Enter the number you want to programme to the key then press or Ok You may include a line or line pool selection in an autodial sequence by selecting the line before entering any digits The number is stored on the key Modular Plus System Admini
307. te a remote access package by defining which of your system line pools the caller will be able to access and whether the caller can use Page and line pools You then assign the package to individual lines using Rem line access and to a particular class of service password Remote access packages defaults Parameter Square PBX Hybrid Package 00 Prohibits remote access to line pools and Page Cannot be changed Package 01 l Line pool access N for Pool A to O Remote Page No Packages 02 15 Line pool access N for Pools A to O Remote Page No You can use COF and the keypad to copy settings from one remote package to another The line pool access display shows an alphabetic line pool identifier followed by a numeric line pool access code in parentheses for example FoolA 93 H If no access code has been identified there is nothing between the brackets for example FoolA 11H The line pool access code can be programmed under Terminals amp Extns Remote package 00 is the default setting for the Remote package setting It does not permit access to line pools or to remote paging Unlike packages 01 to 15 package 00 cannot be changed You can define up to 15 remote access packages 01 to 15 The remote restrictions and line restrictions still apply for remote users who call into the Modular Plus system to use lines for calling out To use features on a Modular Plus system remotely press followed by the fe
308. te appear on the display of idle Modular Plus telephones Telephones connected to an Analogue Terminal Adapter cannot display the time and date Checking the current time and date while on a call You can briefly display the current time and date while you are on a call by pressing JB Static Time When you have a message or a call log item on the telephone display the time and date are not shown The Static Time feature allows the time and date to be displayed at all times Press 0 6 to turn Static Time on Press 0 6 to turn Static Time off Call duration time Use the Call Duration Time feature to see how long you spent on your last call or how long you have been on your present call By pressing you can see how long you spent on your last call how long you have been on your present call Displays 21 42 47 The display shows the last call you made or the current call and the total elapsed time in minutes and seconds Line a i 41 45 You parked your last call The display shows the length of time the call was parked You cannot see the length of time a call was parked unless the call is active at your telephone or has just been released by your telephone Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Using display features 287 Call Information Call Information is an optional supplementary service provided by the public telephone company If your business subscribes to this se
309. tem Administration Guide 312 Digital Private Network Signalling System Number 1 DPNSS 1 Assigning message centres to a line You need to assign one of five or NONE of the message centres to the line 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Extns 4 Press Next _ The display shows Lines 5 Press Show The display shows LinexxxiLinexxx 6 Enter the line number you want to programme 7 Press Show The display shows Line Data 8 Enter the name of the line you want to programme 9 Press Show _ The display shows Call Services 10 Press Next The display shows WMs9 center 11 Change the setting according to the required message centre or NONE 12 Press Show _ The display shows IC key 13 Program the number to be dialled on the IC key when the call has to be made to reach the messaging centre 14 Press Show _ The display shows MWI 15 Program the Non Specified Information NSJ string for message waiting indication that is expected from the particular message centre 16 Press Show _ The display shows FC Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Digital Private Network Signalling System Number 1 DPNSS 1 313 Program the NSI string for message waiting ca
310. tem experiences a mains failure the failure can result in missed Alarm times When the Modular Plus system is running and the system time resets the missed Alarm times alert on respective room or common extensions At all times the Modular Plus system allows up to a maximum of 24 extensions that can alert at the same time Programming the Alarm time feature To programme the Alarm time feature on display telephones 1 Press 6 The display shows Alrm 7 am OFF 2 Correct or change the alarm time Ifthe alarm time is correct press OH OFF The display shows Alrmia 8 anm OH Press DOME to exit To enter a new alarm time press CHG The display shows Enter times 3 Enter a new four digit alarm time If the 24 hour clock format is used hour 00 to 23 and minutes 00 to 59 no confirmation is required The display shows Alarm OH Him e If the 12 hour format is used the display shows hhimm AM or PM7 Press the AM or PH display key The display shows Alarm OH hh am P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 52 Programming Hospitality Services To programme the Alarm time feature on M7000 T7000 telephones or on an analogue telephone 1 Press i 6 7 5 on the T7000 telephone or Recall 6 7 5 on an analogue telephone A tone sounds 2 Enter a four digit alarm time If the 24 hour clock format is used hour 00 to 23 and minutes 00 to 59 a tone sounds
311. tenance View diagnostic information about the system Usage Metrics View statistical information about Hunt groups Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 System programming introduction 25 Each main heading has sub headings within it For example Terminals amp Extns has six sub headings Line access Capabilities Name User preferences Restrictions and Call Services By using the System Administrator Plus password you programme settings for the entire system as well as settings for individual telephones ATTENTION Programming affects system operation Only a qualified installer or sales support officer should perform start up installation and maintenance programming Some of the settings affect the correct operation of the system The first three steps of each procedure allow you to get to Terminals Extns on the telephone display and can be used to access programme headings for any individual item at any time However when you are programming the whole system after you have completed the first programming item it is not necessary to start at step 1 of the next procedure unless you leave programming Just press to move to the next item in the programming sequence While you are programming the system the display occasionally shows Urdate You can press the display key below the word to see what programming changes the system is undergoing Any procedure that specifies usin
312. the Page feature or press PAGE to announce the retrieval code displayed by your telephone Retrieving a parked call 1 Select an internal line on any system telephone On M7100N T7100 and M7000 T7000 telephones pick up the handset 2 Dial the Call Parking retrieval code the default retrieval codes are 101 to 124 The retrieval code for T7100 M7100N and T7000 M7000 telephones is 125 Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Routing calls 245 DIA calls Direct Inward Access DIA allows BRA lines to use internal lines to route incoming calls from the public exchange The calls pass directly to a system extension without operator intervention The internal lines 255 to 382 between the Norstar CCU and the extensions are called DIA lines BRA lines must have Answer Mode programmed to Auto for DIA Outgoing calls can also be made on auto answer BRA lines if they are assigned to a line pool or appear on an extension The Modular Plus system handles simultaneous calls on DIA lines The number of appearances of a DIA line on an extension depends on the Line assignment setting for that extension If the DIA line is programmed to Appr amp Ring or Appr only then the extension can have as many simultaneous DIA calls as there are DIA key appearances If the DIA line is programmed to Ring only then the extension can have as many simultaneous DIA calls as there are Intercom keys Direct Inward Access on Loop guar
313. the company For information about changing passwords see Passwords on page 171 For more information about the settings that can be changed with the Basic password see Using passwords on page 30 Understanding your system Exchange lines have been set up by your installer to be either public private or part of a line pool A public line is assigned to more than one extension A private line is assigned to only one extension and to the Prime extension for that line A line can be assigned to one of three line pools Extensions are assigned access to line pools and they share the lines in the pool with other extensions having access to that pool The Modular Plus system automatically assigns extension 221 the first available extension as the Prime extension for each exchange line The Prime extension provides backup answering for all unanswered calls coming in on the exchange line Software key codes are used to activate optional features on your Norstar system These features are ISDN30 channels and D channel signalling If a Norstar system is powered down for a period of 48 hours or more activated software keys may be lost In all cases starting up a system using SJJ A R T U P erases any existing programmed data including software keys BT reserves the right to apply additional charges for the provision of software keycodes that are lost as a result of a system powered down for more than
314. the system install an uninterruptable power supply UPS stand by power unit for the Modular Plus Troubleshooting a cordless handset If you suspect that you have a faulty cordless handset ensure that your system is functioning properly by using a cordless handset that you know works properly Then troubleshoot the cordless handset When there is a problem with a cordless handset 1 Check that the cordless handset is on and that the battery is not low or incorrectly inserted 2 Establish a radio connection to get dial tone 3 Ifthere is no dial tone on the cordless handset check that dial tone is available from the system e that the cordless handset is inside the radio coverage area Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Note that you have chosen the right system number on the cordless handset that the cordless handset has been assigned the correct extension number by calling it from another telephone to see if it rings that the cordless handset is registered If it is not registered try to register the cordless handset again For further information about registration see Registering cordless handsets on page 103 and the Registration Instructions for your model of cordless handset If the problem persists call your system supplier P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 202 Using telephone features SECTION IV Using telephone features
315. the system Displays Blank display Enter your password It is not shown on the display Invalid Password You have entered a password that is not programmed into your system Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Making internal calls e Making an Internal call 260 e Accessing a Direct Dial extension 260 e Paging 264 e Remote paging 264 e Voice Call 265 P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 260 Making internal calls Making an Internal call When you want to make or receive internal or private network calls make calls to hunt group extensions or access exchange lines through line pools use the programme key labelled Intercom A telephone may be assigned up to eight intercom keys 1 Press an intercom key or lift the handset on M7100N T7100 and M7000 T7000 telephones 2 Dial the extension number or a line pool access code Making a Conference call To establish a conference call with two other system telephones a telephone must have two intercom keys assigned to it Make or answer a call with one extension Put the call on hold Press the remaining intercom key and dial the second extension Press BJ Press the held intercom key step 2 to connect B D EF Accessing a Direct Dial extension The Modular Plus system allows for up to five Direct Dial extensions To access an Direct Dial extension enter the Direct
316. the terminal The Auto called ID identification momentarily shows the number of the called party on the display of a Norstar BST extension The default is No the Auto called ID is not displayed 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Password 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terninals amp Extris 4 Press Show The display shows Show extr t Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to programme The displays shows rinn innn 6 Press Show _ The display shows Line access 7 Press Next until the display shows Call services 8 9 Un Press Show The display shows Auto call info Press Next until the display shows Auta called IDs 10 Press CHANGE to choose N No or Y Yes 11 Press 68 to exit or Next to continue in programming P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 180 Call services Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Remote access Programming lines and features for remote access 182 P0607110 Issue O1 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 182 Remote access Programming lines and features for remote access Remote access packages Remote access packages allow you to control the remote use of Modular Plus line pools and the paging feature You crea
317. this is not desirable you can programme a Call Forward on busy or Call Forward no answer destination for the second extension For example extension 224 is programmed to forward all incoming calls to extension 235 which in turn is programmed to forward all incoming calls to extension 240 Unanswered calls coming in on an outside line are automatically transferred to the Prime extension for that line Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Programming capabilities 101 If the extension is a member of a hunt group the Call Forward no answer feature is overridden and the hunt group call will continue to ring until the hunt time has expired A hunt group extension can be a Call Forward on busy extension 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 8 4 CONFIG The display shows Fassumordi 3 Press 2 6 4 6 ADMIN The display shows Terminals amp eExtrs 4 Press Show _ The display shows Show extnt s 5 Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to programme The display shows nnn innr 6 Press three times The display shows Fwd to Hone 7 Press CHAMGE and enter the extension number where you want the calls to be sent You can press ELF to change the destination back to None 8 Press to exit or to continue in programming Changing the number of rings before a call is forwarded 1
318. tion Removing a restriction removes the overrides associated with it and changes the identifying number of the restriction For example removal of restriction 01 re numbers restrictions 01 to 08 as 01 to 07 Applying restriction filters Once you create the filters you can assign the restrictions to a telephone under Terminals amp Extns to a line under Lines to a particular line on a telephone under Terminals amp Extns and to remote callers under Remote access To assign restriction filters for different times of the day see Restriction service on page 160 See Chart 6 Restriction filters on page 329 in Appendix A for a programming overview 1 Un 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Password I Press 7 2 71 5 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals amp extrs Press Show _ The display shows Show extr t Enter the extension number of the telephone you want to programme The display shows nnn innr Press Show _ The display shows Line access Press Next _ until the display shows Restrictions Press Show The display shows Festrn filters Press Show _ The display shows Show filter Enter the two digit code or press Press Show Use REMOVE ALC the dialpad and OK to change the restrictions f
319. tment The Direct Dial telephone can send up to 30 messages and can invoke Services to activate the extra dial telephone You can forward calls to a Direct Dial telephone that is outside your Modular Plus system if the Direct Dial configuration is set to use a routing table or a prime line where the prime line is set to Intercom An example of this is one of your direct dial telephones is configured on another system that is part of a private network Even though the telephone is on the private network the system considers it an external telephone Note that ISDN terminals cannot use the Direct Dial digit to reach a Direct Dial extension For information about which telephones can access the Direct Dial extension see Assigning telephones to the Direct Dial extension on page 107 See Chart 5 Direct Dial on page 328 in Appendix A for a programming overview See Programming Direct Dial on page 78 for information on using the Direct Dial feature Programming an internal Direct Dial extension 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi 3 Press 7 2 7 56 81 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Extns 4 Press Next _ until the display shows System Fr3rming 5 Press Show _ The display shows Hunt 9raurs 6 Press Next until the display shows Direct dial 7
320. to remove a restiction from this restriction Leriaz MEST Ho overrides Enter digits to be excluded from this restriction Press ALL to add more overrides to this restriction Override AAL Press REMOVE to remove an override from this restriction E _ P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 330 Charts Chart 7 Remote access packages System Prarmina SHOW Hurt Srours I HEXT 3 times Remote access SHOW Rem access pkgs Press Show and enter pkg Press Show to see settings LinePool access Remote rage Remote admin and Remote monitor HEXT Press CHANGE to choose between V Yes and H No Press and enter line number Press CHANGE and enter remote package number Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Charts 331 Chart 8 Extension restrictions Terminals amp Extns SHOW i Show extn Enter extension number SHOW Line access i MEST Capabilities HEXT 3 times Restrictions SHOW Festrn filters HEXT Extn restren SHOW Filters HEAT ExtnLock Press CHANGE to select Hone Full or Partial HEXT Allow last no Press CHANGE to choose between Yes and H No MET Press CHAHGE to choose between Yes and H No Allow saved noi MEST Press CHAHGE to chooose between Yes and H No Allow recall MEST Press CHAHGE to choose between Yes and H N
321. tration Guide 128 Programming Hunt groups Programming the overflow extension You can programme which extension receives overflow calls If the overflow extension is a hunt group extension the call is considered a new call and joins the gueue The overflow extension can be an extension number associated with a voice mailbox l Setting the name Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press 2 6 6 6 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fassword I Press 7 2 7 5 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Extns Press Next until the display shows System FrArmina Press Show The display shows Hunt Srours Press Show The display shows Show 3raur Enter the hunt group number you want to programme 01 30 Press Show _ The display shows Member extns Press Next until the display shows Overf lows Press Show The display shows Duerf low HGn Press CHANGE to change the overflow position Enter the new overflow position Press to exit or to continue programming You can programme the hunt group name such as SERVICE or SALES The name can be up to seven characters in length Note The Hunt group name does not display on incoming calls to 2 Oy a that group only the line or extension number Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press 2 6 6 4 4 CO
322. twork processing load making the system more efficient MWI provides users with the ability to scroll through erase and reply to messages When there are messages to be retrieved Message for ou is displayed at the extension Once all the messages are retrieved by the user a Message Waiting Cancellation MWC is sent from the call centre and the user extension no longer displays MWI MWI also allows the user to reply or call back to the message centre This feature is only supported on Norstar target lines Setting Message Waiting Indication First you must provide an extension with the ability to access target lines for receiving messages 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Passwords 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Extrs 4 Press Show _ The display shows Show extn 5 Enter the line number you want to programme 6 Press Show The display shows Line Access 7 Press Nex Until the display shows Call Services 8 Press Show The display shows Auto call info 9 Press Show The display shows Call log set 10 Change this setting to N 11 Press Show _ The display shows Ext 1 UH 9 set 12 Change this setting to Y 13 Press Next to continue programming and proceed to step 4 below P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus Sys
323. u must assign restrictions for the user instead of for the extension 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Password 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Extns 4 Press Next until the display shows Passwords 5 Press Show The display shows COS rswds 6 Press Show The displays shows Show Pswd 3 7 Enter a two digit password 00 to 99 8 Press Show The display shows the setting for that COS password 9 Press Next The display shows User flt 10 Press CHAHGE 11 Enter the number for the restriction filter to be applied with this COS password 12 Press 48 to exit or to continue in programming P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 90 Barring calls and privileges Restrictions Assigning line restrictions to the COS password 1 GO El Ne Er 9 10 Press CHAHGE Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press 2 6 6 6 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fassworg I Press 7 2 7 5 68 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Esths Press Press Press Next Show Show until the display shows Passwords The display shows COS rsuds The displays shows Show Pswd 5 Enter a two digit password 00 to 99
324. ular Plus System Administration Guide 236 Answering calls If there is more than one incoming call on lines in a Ringing service the Line Answer feature picks up the external call that has been ringing the longest Displays Line denied You have tried to pick up a call on someone else s private line Fickur denied The call that is ringing is on a line that is not in a Ringing Service Note Line Answer does not pick up calls that are coming in on a private line Answer keys An Answer key allows a telephone to receive calls intended for another telephone For example an Answer key allows an assistant to answer incoming calls to a manager s telephone When installing your Modular Plus system you assign telephones to have Answer keys for other extensions You also set whether the incoming call for the monitored extension will ring at the Answer key or simply activate the key indicator lt 4 or P or CA for T7316E telephones A BST or Norstar telephone may have up to eight Answer keys to monitor other extensions M7100N T7100 and M7000 T7000 telephones SLTs and ISDN terminals cannot be assigned Answer keys to monitor other extensions but they can be monitored Each Answer key should be clearly labelled with the name or number of the extension it monitors You cannot make calls using Answer keys If more than one call is ringing at a telephone the first call appears on the attendant s Answer key Any subsequent calls
325. uld memorise their COS passwords instead of writing them down You can use COPY and the keypad to copy the restriction filters and remote package from one COS password to another COS passwords must be unique Before you begin programming a COS password make sure you have defined the appropriate restriction filters in Restrictions under Lines Then check that you have created a suitable remote package in Remote access under System erarmind See Using Class of service passwords on page 257 for information about using this feature Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Barring calls and privileges Restrictions 89 Selecting a COS password l 9 GO D SB Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press 2 6 6 6 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fassword Press 7 2 7 5 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Term inals amp extrs Press Next until the display shows Passwords Press Show The display shows COS rswds Press Show The displays shows Show Pswd 5 Enter a two digit password 00 to 99 Press Show The display shows the setting for that COS password Press CHAHGE 10 Enter a password maximum six digits 11 Press 48 to exit or to continue in programming Assigning user restrictions to the COS password A COS password can be used by internal and external users therefore yo
326. umber of spaces allocated to each log An Alarm extension displays system alarm codes should they occur You can determine which extension receives the alarms The default is extension 221 ATTENTION The Alarm telephone must have a two line display The Alarm telephone must be a T7316 T7316E an M7310N or an M7324N telephone See Recording and reporting alarm codes on page 198 for information about the alarm codes l OY PB Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fassuordi Press 7 2 7 6 6 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Extns Press Next until the display shows System Frarmina Press Show _ The display shows Hunt 9rours Press Next until the display shows Featr settings Press Show _ The display shows Back9rnd music P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 142 Programming feature settings 8 Press until the display shows AlarmExtni 9 Press CHAHGE 10 Enter the extension number or press CLF to set the Alarm telephone to None 11 Press 68 to exit or to continue in programming Answer extension The Answer extns setting in Terminals amp Extns programming allows you to assign Answer extension numbers to a telephone The AnsExtn setting in Featr settings programming allows you to determine what types of calls will
327. until the display shows System Fr9rming The display shows Hunt Srours until the display shows Featr settings The display shows Back9rnd music until the display shows Came timeouts Press CHAHGE to choose 30 45 60 90 120 150 or 180 seconds 10 Press 48 to exit or to continue in programming The Call Parking feature allows you to place a call on hold and assign it a code so it can be retrieved from any telephone in the Modular Plus system The Park timeout setting allows you to specify how long in seconds a call can be parked without being answered before the call is returned to the telephone that parked the call See Call Parking on page 244 for information about using this feature l Io Oe oy CNE Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi Press Termi Press Press Press Press Press 7 21 71 6 68 7 SAPLUS The display shows nals Extrs Next _ until the display shows System Frarmina Show _ The display shows Hunt 3rours Next _ until the display shows Featr settings Show _ The display shows Back9rnd music Next _ until the display shows Park timeouts Press CHAHGE to choose 30 45 60 90 120 150 180 300 or 600 seconds 10 Press 48 to exit or to continue in programming Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01
328. up 237 Disconnecting Accidentally 237 Malicious call identification MCID 237 Holding calls 239 Holding 240 Listening on hold 241 Routing calls 243 Call Parking 244 DIA calls 245 Making a Priority call 247 Transferring a call 247 Transferring to a busy extension Call Camping 248 Making external calls 251 Using an exchange code 252 Using line pools 252 Making a conference call 253 Using Class of service passwords 257 Making internal calls 259 Making an Internal call 260 Making a Conference call 260 Accessing a Direct Dial extension 260 Leaving Messages 261 Paging 264 Remote paging 264 Voice Call 265 Forwarding calls 268 Forwarding your calls 269 External Call Forward 270 Forwarding all calls 271 Line redirection 272 P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide Saving time with features Using system Speed Dial 279 Using Autodial 279 Using Redial 281 Programming memory keys 282 Using Ring Again 283 Using Hotline 284 Using display features Time and Date 286 Static Time 286 Call duration time 286 Call Information 287 Calllog 288 Autobumping 293 Call Charge 293 Special dialling features Special dialling features 296 Inserting apause 296 Setting long tones 296 Programmed Release 297 Recall 297 Run Stop 297 Wait for Dial Tone 298 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN ISDN services 300 Digital Network Adapter 302 278 285 295 299 Digi
329. up for the system The default is Yes which means that Directed pickup is enabled See Answering a telephone using Directed Pickup on page 234 for information about using this feature 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Extrs 4 Press Next until the display shows System Fr9rming 5 Press Show _ The display shows Hunt araurs 6 Press Next until the display shows Featr settings 7 Press Show The display shows Back3rnd music 8 Press Next until the display shows Directd rickurF 9 Press CHAHGE to choose Y Yes or N No 10 Press 48 to exit or to continue in programming You can choose whether a tone sounds before a page begins See Paging on page 264 for information about using the Paging feature 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Password 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Exths 4 Press Next until the display shows Sastem ergrming 5 Press Show _ The display shows Hunt araurs 6 Press Next until the display shows Featr settings 7 Press Show The display shows Back3rnd music 8 Press Next unti
330. used on any Norstar extension On most system telephones you must use specific keys and or enter a number code to access the features For a description of the types of BST and Norstar telephones that can be used on your system see About your system telephones on page 203 DPNSS 1 capabilities Norstar supports the following capabilities over DPNSS 1 lines Direct Inward Access DIA for incoming calls e Originating Line Identification OLI for incoming and outgoing calls for incoming calls the Calling Line Identification CLI CLID information is displayed to the user on extensions with line display must be configured in programming for outgoing calls the directory number of the originating party is sent out as OLI Terminal Line Identification TLI for incoming and outgoing calls Referred to as Called Line Identification calls between DPNSS 1 and BRI PRI DASS2 Analogue and AC15 lines use Selective Line Redirect SLR or External Call Forward ECF Note that under certain line conditions ECF will not work remote access features DIA line pool access code destination Codes remote page feature codes Software Keys these are required to enable DPNSS 1 Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Digital Private Network Signalling System Number 1 DPNSS 1 305 DPNSS 1 features Some DPNSS 1 features are identical to existing Norstar features and are simply enhanc
331. utobume OM To disable Autobumping Press 5 The display shows Autoburme OFF Modular Plus extensions can display information about the cost of the last call placed on a DASS2 line This is the basic call charge only and may not include any applicable taxes or other charges Viewing the charge for your last DASS2 call Press eJ BJJ Ensure Call Charge data applies to last call The Call Charge information displayed by this feature is for the last call for which such information was available If your last call did not provide Call Charge information the display shows the Call Charge information for the last call for which such information was available To avoid confusion note the time of the call Note To get Call Charge information for both parts of a conference call in which you placed both of the conferenced calls disconnect one call check the Call Charge information for that call then disconnect the second P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 294 Using display features call and check the Call Charge information for that call If you disconnect both calls simultaneously only the information for one will be available To see how long a call lasted use the Call Duration Time feature Ce Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Special dialling features e Special dialling features 296 Inserting a pause 296 Setting long tones
332. utomatically put on hold 2 Press The second person is put on hold You can re establish the conference using this sequence 1 Take one call off hold 2 Press B 3 Take the other call off hold Putting a conference on hold You can put a conference on hold allowing the other two people to continue speaking to each other 1 Press You can reconnect to the conference by pressing either of the held line keys Splitting a conference You can talk with one person while the other person is on hold P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 256 Making external calls M7208N T7208 M7310N T7316 T7316E or M7324N telephones Press the line key of the person you want to speak to The other person is automatically put on hold M7000 T7000 telephones 2 Press B The first party is on hold 3 Press sdh if necessary to switch parties On M7100 T7100N telephones 1 Press The first party is on hold 2 Press if necessary to switch parties Re establishing the conference 1 Press On the M7000 T7000 telephone press 8 Removing yourself from a conference You can remove yourself from a conference and connect the other two callers through your Modular Plus system Press 0 the Transfer feature code When you remove yourself from a conference using the Transfer feature and both callers are from outside your system one of t
333. ve each extension a unigue name As the administrator you can programme the system so that when you enter an internal extension number the name appears on your telephone display At the same time the person you are calling sees your name on their display See Chart 2 Naming extensions on page 326 of Appendix A for a programming overview 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fassumordi 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Extns 4 Press Show _ The display shows Show extr t Enter the extension number of the telephone you want to programme The display shows nnn innr Press Show The display shows Line access Press until the display shows Hammet Press CHAHGE Un ND Enter the characters of the name using the keypad by pressing gt after each letter or press to restore the default name 10 Press to store the name 11 Press 48 to exit or to continue in programming Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 Naming extensions and lines 71 Naming lines Assigning names to lines can help you identify incoming calls For example if both the Sales line and the Service line ring at your extension your display shows which line the call is on Sales or Service when the line key is pressed or the handset
334. ware fault that may occur Write the system processor version number in the maintenance records 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 6 4 E CONFIG The display shows Fassumordi 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Extns 4 Press Next until the display shows Maintenance 5 Press Show The display shows System version 6 Press Show The display shows the version number of the system processor 7 Write the system processor version number in the appropriate maintenance record 8 Press to exit or to continue in programming System administration log record You can check under the Sys admin log heading to find a list of administrative events performed on Modular Plus Use the following table to record these log items whenever you run a Maintenance session 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Extns 4 Press Next _ until the display shows Maintenance 5 Press Show The display shows System version 6 Press Next until the display shows Sys admin 109 7 Press Show _ The display shows Items in logi 8 Press Next and Back to move down or up the list of ev
335. when no line button was available Some features also require you to have a button free Releasing calls can free up line buttons Modular Plus System Administration Guide P0607110 Issue 01 About your system telephones 215 Make calls first Ho free lines Ho line selected In use 221 Incoming only B QUIT BESP OK Invalid number Line denied Restricted call The feature you tried to use requires you to be on an active call at your telephone This display also appears when information about a call has been cleared by a system reset All the lines or line pools available to the telephone are in use This display also appears when you have tried to dial an external number or use a feature that conflicts with the lines line pools or Prime line used by the telephone This must be corrected by your customer service representative or installer The telephone has been set up to dial an external number on a Prime line but the telephone does not have a Prime line This must be corrected by your customer service representative or installer You have tried to programme redirection while someone else is programming redirection Only one person can programme line redirection at a time The line you are trying to use for redirecting calls is for incoming calls only Choose an outgoing line Continue entering digits Press the volume control or BESF to delete incorrect digits Press or Gk when you are finished
336. with a feature code 168 e Assigning control extensions 168 e Changing the name of a schedule 170 e Changing the time of a schedule 170 P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 158 Programming Services Using alternate or scheduled services Your Modular Plus system is set up to handle calls during normal business hours However you may wish to handle incoming calls differently at lunch time in the evening at night or during holidays To accommodate changes Modular Plus provides Services that let you customise the way calls are handled at different times of the day on schedules Besides a Normal schedule there are six additional schedules Three of the schedules are already named Lunch Evening and Night You can assign new names for these modes and assign names to the three unnamed schedules When Ringing service and Restriction service are set to manual a control extension is used to place the extensions and exchange lines that it controls into and out of service schedules A control extension can be assigned to control either lines or extensions or both lines and extensions A service schedule activates three aspects of system operation Ringing Restriction and Routing You can customise the Ringing service so that an extra extension rings for calls placed to the Direct Dial extension additional extensions ring for incoming calls an auxiliary rin
337. xtns 4 Press Next _ twice The display shows Services 5 Press Show The display shows Ringing service 6 Press Show The display shows Ringing grours 7 Press Next until the display shows the period you want to set the service for Sched Hight Evening Lunch or customise your own Sched 4 Sched 5 or Sched 6 8 Press Show _ The display shows Serwice 9 Press CHAHGE to choose Manual Auto or Off 10 Press 48 to exit or to continue in programming Add extensions for Ringing service You can add lines within groups to ring for these services on different extensions For example you might want the ring to be heard at two locations for ease of access To add an extension 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Passwords 3 Press 7 2 7 6 6 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terninals amp Extris 4 Press twice The display shows Services 5 Press Show _ The display shows Ringing service P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 160 Programming Services 6 Press Show _ The display shows Rinaima ar urs 7 Press Show _ The display shows Fina arr 881 10 11 12 Press to cycle through the ring groups until you find the one you want from 001 to 100 Or enter the number directly on the keypad Press Show _ The displa
338. y shows Show extant i Press to cycle through the extensions available or enter the number directly on the keypad The extension currently assigned to Ringing service will display Assigned Press CHAHGE to assign another extension to ringing service Press to exit or to continue in programming Deleting extensions from ringing service To delete an extension from Ringing service follow the same steps as for adding The final CHAMGE step will Unassign the extension Restriction service Assigning restriction filters to schedules gives you control over calls made outside of normal business hours For example you may allow long distance calls during the day but bar them in the evening using the Night schedule and on weekends using Schedule 5 which you may have renamed Weekend schedule See Chart 18 Restriction service on page 340 in Appendix A for a programming overview l AS Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Exths Press Nex twice The display shows Services Press Show The display shows Ringing service Press Next The display shows Festrn service Press Show _ The display shows Sched Hight Press Show _ and use CHANGE to choose Manual Auto or Off Press to exit or to continue in pro
339. y to exit programming P0607110 Issue 01 Modular Plus System Administration Guide 54 Programming Hospitality Services Room occupancy RO The Room occupancy RO feature allows front desk operators to assign dialling restrictions to room extensions and also works with the Room condition RC feature Dialling permissions for room extensions defined in Restrictions under Terminals amp Extns and Call permissions underHosFitality in System Pra mina replace dialling filters set under Services The RO feature does not apply to common extensions The RO feature uses the following room states Vacant Room is empty Basic Room is occupied and occupants can access basic callout features Mid Room is occupied and occupants can access basic callout features plus other specified features for instance toll free calling Full Room is occupied and occupants can access all call features allowed on the system A dialling filter can be assigned to each room state to provide permission control for outgoing calls from the room The default setting is Vacant Programming the state of a room extension To access the Room Occupancy feature and assign the state of a room extension 1 Press 8 on a two line display Norstar BST extension 2 If configured the display reads Password Enter the Desk admin password 3 The display reads Oc of rm Enter the room number and press OF or LIST 4 The display reads
340. your telephone You must use the receiver or the handsfree button to answer a call You are receiving a Priority Call If you are on another call inform the person you are speaking to that the call is about to be put on hold Press the flashing line indicator of the Priority Call or wait until the call connects automatically in 8 seconds The Priority Call goes through when you hear the next beep Your active call is placed on Exclusive Hold It is reconnected automatically when the Priority Call ends unless you transfer the Priority Call in which case you must press the line button of your original call to reconnect Use DND L _ 8 amp or press BLOCK to reject a priority call You have no free line buttons on which to receive a call Release one of your current calls and try to answer the incoming call again You have received a Ring Again offer for a line pool Press the flashing internal line button or ES to use the line pool On T7100 M7100N or T7000 M7000 telephones just lift the receiver Otherwise press H or wait 30 seconds for the Ring Again offer to expire You cannot programme a feature button while you are on a call You have tried to use a feature while you were on acall or had calls on hold Release the call or calls before using the feature The line is in use Make the call using normal methods or wait until the line is free You have tried to make receive or pick up a call

Modular Plus System Administration Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents